Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
1
PRECAUTIONS
COPYRIGHT:
• Distributing copies of MP3, WMA, WMA with DRM tracks and/or WMV files without
permission is a violation of international copyright laws.
• This Product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.
SAFETY:
• Vibration experienced during walking or exercising will not affect the player. However,
dropping the player or dropping a heavy object on the player may result in damage or
sound distortion.
• Avoid spilling any liquid onto or into the player.
• Do not leave the player in a location near heat sources; in a location subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, sand, moisture, rain or mechanical shock; on an unlevel surface;
or in a car with the windows closed during periods of excessive heat.
ROAD SAFETY:
• Do not use headphones while driving, cycling or operating any motorized vehicle. It may
create a traffic hazard and it is illegal in some areas. It can be potentially dangerous to
play your headset at a high volume while walking, especially at pedestrian crossings. You
should exercise extreme caution or discontinue use in potentially hazardous situations.
FCC WARNING:
• This equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications
to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly
approved in the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this
equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
2
FCC DECLARATION
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
3
Dear Customer:
Selecting fine audio and video equipment such as the unit you’ve just purchased is only
the start of your musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how you can maximize the
fun and excitement your equipment offers. This manufacturer and the Electronic
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud
and clear without annoying blaring or distortion and, most importantly, without affecting
your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing “comfort level” adapts to higher
volumes of sound. So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and harmful to your
hearing. Guard against this by setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your
hearing adapts.
Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent hearing damage or loss in the future.
After all, we want you listening for a lifetime.
4
Decibel
Level Example
30 Quiet library, soft whispers
40 Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic
50 Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office
60 Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine
70 Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant
80 Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock at two feet
We
Want You
LISTENING
For A Lifetime
C IND
NI U
R O
S
ELECT
TR
EIA
IES
EST. 1924
A
N
S
S O
O C I A TI
5
LOCATION OF CONTROLS
FRONT 1. Touch Screen Display
2. Volume Up/Down Buttons
3. Left/Skip/Search Up Button
4. Microphone (Side of Unit)
5. Power/Lock Switch
1 6. Menu Button
7. Center/Play/Pause Button
8. Right/Skip/Search Down Button
9. Reset Button (Hole on Side of Unit)
10. Headphones Jack
5 (HEADPHONES PART NO.
CTEAREDFD00873B-0-00*)
6 11. Micro SD Memory Card Slot
2 12. USB Slot (USB CABLE PART NO.
CTPCLUSBZY00500-0-00 (White)*
7
CTPCLUSBZY00400-0-00 (Black)*)
3 8
13. USB/Memory Card Slot Cover
4 9
6
CHARGING THE BATTERY
This unit has a built-in Lithium Polymer rechargeable battery. When the
bars in the battery indicator (in the display) become low (see Figure 1) and
before using the unit for the first time, recharge the battery as follows.
Figure 1
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack on this unit (as shown)
and to the USB port on your computer; “CONNECTING” will
appear on the screen. The battery will charge when connected
to the USB jack.
NOTES:
• To disconnect this unit from your computer, make sure to follow the “Safely Remove
Hardware” instructions on page 23.
• You must charge this unit for three hours before using for the first time.
• It takes approx. 4 hours to charge the battery from empty to full. When fully charged,
the unit can play back for approx. 50 hours in Music Playback mode and 4 hours in
Video mode. (Actual playback times may vary.)
• For data transfer, please use the USB cable to connect the unit to your computer.
• When the battery is completely empty and connected to the computer for charging, it
may take a several minutes for the “CONNECTING” screen to be displayed.
7
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
Software Installation CD (PART NO. CTPCDMEMO085001-0-00)
General Information
This unit is compatible with Microsoft Windows XP (Home or Professional Edition with
Service Pack 2 or higher) or Vista. The MediaCoder is compatible with Microsoft
Windows XP and Vista.
Windows will automatically detect the audio player without installing the CD software
when the USB cable is connected.
8
WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11 INSTALLATION
Installing Windows Media Player 11 will allow you to transfer MP3 files, WMA files, WMA
files with DRM 10 and photos to your player using the “Sync” function.
NOTE: This unit is not compatible with WMP 10.
9
WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11 INSTALLATION (CONT.)
4. Read the License Agreement, then click
“I Accept”.
10
INSTALLING MEDIACODER
Procedure to Install MediaCoder
11
INSTALLING MEDIACODER (CONTINUED)
4. The “Installation Folder” screen will appear. It is
recommended to keep the folder as is. Then
click “Install”; the program will then install.
12
INSTALLING AUDIBLEMANAGER
AudibleManager is software that enables you to download and listen to Audible
audiobooks. Use AudibleManager to transfer audiobook programs to your
AudibleReady ® TouchMP.
Before you install AudibleManager, please be sure that your computer has
Microsoft Windows XP or Vista installed with WMP11.
NOTE: Please disable any Firewall software running on your computer before
downloading AudibleManager. We also recommend that you download
AudibleManager using Internet Explorer.
13
INSTALLING AUDIBLEMANAGER (CONTINUED)
4. Follow instructions on the screen to install.
NOTE:
One log-in account for AudibleManager is limited to three devices and four
desktops. If you attempt to exceed this limit, you will get an error message and you
will not be able to playback the audiobook file.
14
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES
MEDIA FILES SUPPORTED FORMATS
Audio Formats: MP3, WMA files with DRM 10 with a bit rate of 48-192 kbps
Video Formats: AVI-MPEG4: Simple Profile (320x240 resolution 20-24 fps, 385kbps);
WMV: VC-1 Simple Profile (320x240 resolution, 20-24fps, 385kbps max)
Photo Format: Baseline JPEGs
TRANSFERRING FILES
You can download digital music files from the Internet or use
encoding software to convert music that you have on an audio
CD into MP3 or WMA format. Once these files are stored on
your computer, you can easily copy them to your player.
If you have already installed WMP 11 (Windows Media
Player 11), you can transfer music files (MP3, WMA and/or
WMA files with DRM 10), photos and videos to the player
through the "Sync" function of WMP 11. Connect your player
to the USB port on your computer as shown to the right and
see page 20 for details.
16
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES (CONT.)
5. Your browser will open to audible.com. Create
an account and purchase a book or sign into
your account to view “My Library”.
INTERNAL MEMORY:
There is 5 MB of internal memory. Be careful not
to approach this memory or you will receive the
error message shown at right.
17
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES (CONT.)
CONVERTING AN AUDIO CD INTO MP3 OR WMA FORMAT
For Windows XP, you can also utilize the previously installed Windows Media Player 11 software
to convert music on an audio CD into MP3 or WMA format as follows:
1. Open the Windows Media Player 11 Browser, then click on the “Rip” icon on the top tool bar.
Insert a Music CD into the CD-Rom drive of your computer.
2. Check that you are connected to the Internet and then start Windows Media Player (WMP)
When you are connected to the Internet, WMP attempts to retrieve media information such as
the album and artist name about the tracks being ripped from a Windows Media database that
is maintained by Microsoft. WMP then adds the information to the files during ripping. If media
information is incorrect or missing, you can add or edit it after ripping. For information about
adding or editing media information, see Windows Media Player Help on the WMP web page.
3. (Optional) To select a different format or bit rate for the files that
are created during ripping, click the arrow below the Rip tab,
as shown in the following screen shot, and then make your
selections from the Format and Bit Rate commands.
4. (Optional) You can also change the default settings later on the
Rip Music tab of the Options dialog box, which is accessible by
clicking the arrow below the Rip tab, and then clicking More
Options, as shown.
18
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES (CONT.)
5. Insert an audio CD into the CD drive, and then click the Rip
tab, as shown. By default, WMP begins ripping the CD
automatically when you are in the Rip tab or when you first
switch to it after the CD was inserted. You can also choose to
have ripping begin immediately upon inserting the CD, or you
can turn off automatic ripping from the Rip Music tab of the
Options dialog box. Note that all songs are selected to be
ripped if you have not previously ripped them.
8. When the files are finished loading into the unit, you can follow the “Safely Removing
Hardware” procedure as shown on page 23.
NOTE: For more details, please see Microsoft’s help web page for WMP11 as follows:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
19
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES (CONT.)
TRANSFERRING MP3/WMA/VIDEO/PHOTO FILES AND WMA FILES WITH
DRM 10 USING WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
To transfer MP3/WMA/PHOTO/VIDEO/WMA files with DRM 10 to the player, follow the
procedure described below using the previously installed WMP (Windows Media Player)
11. Before beginning the procedure, please connect the unit to the computer as
previously described.
1. Open “Windows Media Player 11”; WMP will automatically sync your entire library.
You can also choose what syncs automatically by selecting the playlists you want to
sync. With this option, the Player syncs your digital media files to the device to mirror
your library when you connect it to your computer or when you change sync settings.
2. You can also drag and drop files into their respective folders. For example, drag and
drop photo (jpg) files into the Pictures folder, etc.
3. After you are finished transferring all the desired files to your unit, follow the “Safely
Removing Hardware” procedure on page 23.
NOTES:
• For WMA files with DRM 10, the files will not be played if you transfer the files into
the micro SD card’s memory. You must transfer the WMA files with DRM 10 to the
player’s internal memory for playback.
• If the external card is inserted, the memory card indicator will appear at the top of the
screen.
• For more details, please see Microsoft’s help web page for WMP11 as follows:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
20
DOWNLOADING AND TRANSFERRING FILES (CONT.)
CREATING A PLAYLIST USING WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
Follow the steps below to create a playlist for the Playlist option in the menu, using
WMP (Windows Media Player) 11:
6. To save the list, click Save Playlist at the bottom of the List pane, and then type a
name for the playlist.
7. Connect the unit to the computer and WMP will automatically sync the playlist to it
(if you set the WMP to automatically sync, as shown on page 20).
NOTES:
• For more details, please see Microsoft’s help web page for WMP11 as follows:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
21
USING MEDIACODER
You can use the previously installed MediaCoder to convert MPG, MPG4, ASF, AVI and
WMV files to AVI files supported by the player.
6. Now you can convert additional files according to the above procedures, if desired.
22
SAFELY REMOVING HARDWARE
SAFELY REMOVING YOUR PLAYER FROM THE COMPUTER
NOTE: To avoid damage to your player or data loss, always follow the procedure listed
below before disconnecting your player from the USB port on your computer.
NOTES:
• If the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon is not displayed on the
task bar, please double-click on My Computer. Right-click on
“Memorex TouchMP” and left-click on “Eject”. Then it is safe
to remove the player from the computer.
• If you are using Windows XP and the Windows Media Player 11 software is already
installed, then you do not need to follow the above "Safely Remove Hardware"
procedure.
23
GENERAL OPERATION
HEADPHONES JACK VOLUME AND MUTE
1 1 1
2
Plug the headphones into the Headphones To control the volume, simply press the Volume
jack on the bottom of the unit. Up 1 or Down 2 button. While changing the
volume, the volume “pop up” indicator will be
overlaid across the bottom of the existing
screen and will disappear after five seconds if
neither Volume button is pressed.
When the volume “pop up” indicator appears,
you can mute the sound by touching the
indicator. Touch again or press one of the
Volume buttons to resume the sound.
LOCK FUNCTION
24
GENERAL OPERATION (CONTINUED)
TURNINGUSBTHE
CONNEPOWER
CTION SCREENSON/OFF MENU BUTTON
1 1
USB and DASHBOARD
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
CONNECTING TRANSFERRING
OK TO
DO NOT DO NOT
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
RADIO VIDEO
To turn thethunit
e computon,er, the scslide
reen will the Power/Lock
transferred it will displaswitch At any time, press the Menu button to return to
the Main menu.
When the unit is connected to When the unit is not transferring
upward andeshstthen
ablishes arelease; the unit will enter Main
Once the unit is disconnected the Once the unit has finished the
y screen will show initialization initialization sequence it will go
To turn the unit off, slide and hold the Power/ navigate the menus.
Lock switch upward. Do not release the Power/
Lock switch until the unit’s display turns off.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM Dashboard Icons
1
This indicates the battery status.
This indicates that th
Memory Card50slot
% - 26is%located at the bottom of the unit.
Open the compartment by sliding it out SDand
Card insert a
RADIO VIDEO
micro SD memory
25% - 11card
% (not included) up to 8GB, with
the front of the card facing up as shown. To remove
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
GOODBYE
This indicates that an
25
GENERAL OPERATION (CONTINUED)
m
1 2
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU SELECTION
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSICPHOTO PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO
3
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK
1 SETTINGS VOICE
2
AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOICE
AUDIOBOOK AUDIO
SETBTO
INOG
KS SETTINGS
button to return to it. simply pressing it. You can also use the
own on the icon. icon. You can also change the hard buttons to move around
con hen using the hard button
menu item rd buttons. the Main Menu
4 of 14
Now Pl ayi ng
level of options.
00: 27 / 03: 25
Al l Songs
3
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
TAP Ar t i st
IST NAVIGATION
Genr e
3. i t em 10. i t em Ta3p
. i tt e
hme Now Playing icon at the 3. i t em 72. i t em
screen.
6. i t em 13. i t em 6. i t em 6. i t em
7. i t em 14. i t em 7. i t em 7. i t em
3 Hold
1 2 TAP
When in the list screen use the Every page change brings the To move rapidly through pages This will eventually take you to the
When in the list screen use the
scrolling buttons on right side highlight bar up to the top. hold down the bottom scrolling final page with the highlight bar
scrolling buttons on right side
4 5
the end
2. No One El se 2. No One El se
ROCK SHUFFLE
3. The Wor l d Has Tur 3. The Wor l d Has Tur
7. Say It Ai n’ t So 7. Say It Ai n’ t So
If an item in the list is too long and you want RETURN BUTTON
In the list mode the first way to Tap directly on your selection and Your Selection will begin to play
to view the whole name, press and hold the To return to the previous page, press the
it will take you to the next screen.
select a list item is to directly
tap on the item
item. When you release, the text will scroll return button in the top right corner of the
to show the whole item. screen.
It will also show the whole name if you
select the item by the Left/Up or Right/
Down button.
6 NOW PLAYING
When NOW PLAYING appears at the
bottom of the screen, touch it and the unit
will enter the main screen of the media you
are listening to.
This function is available for Music, Radio,
and Audiobook only.
27
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU: Press the Menu button to access the Main menu.
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MU S I C P H OT O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
R ADI O VI DE O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MA I N ME N U N 1O1:W
0 5 PP
M L AY I N G
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M R ADI O VI DE O
11: 05 P M
11: 05 P M R ADI O VI DE O
MU S I C P H OT O VOI C E AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
MU S I C P H OT O
N OW P L AY I N G
O VOI C E AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
N OW P L AY I N G N OW P L AY I N G
28
AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
R ADI O VI DE O
AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
N OW P L AY I N G
N OW P L AY I N G
OPERATION–MUSIC
NOW PLAYPLAYBACK MODE
EPEAT ALL VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
List Item 6 6. Sur f Wa
Ful
Now Playing
Toggle Full or
No
Standard
ToggleScreen
Back (One TStep)
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
4 of 14
Full Back oggle Full
REPEAT 1 Screen Album Art 00: 27 / 03: 25 (one Step) Screen Album Art
EEQ
Q SetSetting Playback Mode
ROCK SHUFFLE
ting Playback
Mode
Change
ChanAlbum
ge Photo Art
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
SHUFFLE
Previous
Previous TraTrack Forward
Forward and and
4. Buddy Hol l y
Play/Pause (Hold)
Rewind (Hold) Fast Forward Rewind (Hold)
(hold)
TO LISTEN TO MP3s/WMAs
Play/Pause P
Button B
This unit supports the following audio formats: MP3, MPEG 1/2/2.5 Layer 3 with a bit rate of 32-320
IC1
kbps and WMA files or WMA with DRM 10 with a bit rate of 48-192 kbps.
2
MAIN MENU
Now Pl ayi ng
Al l Songs
MUSIC PHOTO
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Ar t i st
TAP
Al bum
TAP VIDEO
RADIO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO
Genr e
29 G
OPERATION–MUSIC PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
3
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
MUSIC
Music Navigation THE MUSIC LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
All Songs: Touch and all songs will appear in the next list. Scroll through and touch
menu. selection.
30
OPERATION–MUSIC PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
FORWARD/REVERSE SKIP
1 2
During playback, touch the m icon (or press the Left/Up During playback, touch the l icon (or
button) to move the player back to the beginning of the press the Right/Down button) to advance
currently playing file. Touch/press repeatedly to move
the player back to lower-numbered files. the player to the beginning of the next file.
NOTE: If the music does not start playing within 5 Touch/press repeatedly to advance the
seconds, press the Left/Up button again to go back to player to higher-numbered files.
the previous file.
31
OPERATION–MUSIC PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
NOTES:
• See pages 15-21 for information on uploading MP3/WMA files to this unit.
• While you are browsing your music, you can touch the Return icon to return to the
previous menu.
• You can pause playback during Music Playback by touching the p icon or pressing
the Center button. Touch the ® icon or press the Center button to resume playback.
• Set the Play mode to Normal, Repeat One, Repeat All or Shuffle as shown on the next
page.
• You can also use the Left/Up, Right/Down and Center buttons instead of the m, l
and ® icons respectively to navigate and select the items as shown on the previous
two pages.
• Adjust the volume as shown on page 24.
EQUALIZER (EQ)
32
OPERATION–MUSIC PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
PLAY MODES
1
MUSIC
TOGGLE ALBUM ART
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
00: 27 / 03: 25
continuously.
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
continuously.
return to the normal now Shuffle:
bar andtoTimerandomly play
pop uall
p bar of
back the
to toggselected
The upper left button is used Push the button again to After 2 sec. the Play function Tap the screen to bring the
songs.
to toggle between full album bar dissapear le
art and the Standard Screen playing screen. until you tap the screen the normal Now Playing Screen
1 2
CHANGE ALBUM ART
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
SELECT ALBUM ART 11: 05 PM SELECT ALBUM ART 11: 05 PM
4 of 14
4 of 14
Def aul t Dodger gam e 01.j pg
00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
Bear br i ck phot os 02
TAP
When in the Music Playing screen, touch Touch Default for the Default
In the photo listicon
you can uor
se thtouch
The album art can be changed The album art can be changed The photo select list displays either
the Album Art icon; the Album Art selection My Photo to select oneas of
well. your photos. The
by tapping on the album art box. by tapping on the album art box. default - which shows album art or e When a phot
If there is no album art, then hard buttons to navigate the list
My Photo - which allows you to art changes
33
OPERATION–MUSIC PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
een to bring the You can still use the hard buttons
1
Now Playing Screen in the General Play Functions
2. j pg TAP
again.
01.j pg
02.j pg
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
k phot os 01 4. Buddy Hol l y
k phot os 02
TAP
list you can use the When a photo is chosen, the album
to navigate the list art changes to the photo
34
Bear b
pg 24 / 234 11: 05 PM
Go to Music NOW PLAYING List Item 7 Bear b
Now Playing
Bear buddy.j pg
Toggle Landscape 24 / 234
Back Thumnail
Mode (one Step) selection box
/Pause
eshow
on
Next
Picture
Back
(one Step)
Previous Picture Next Picture
Play/Pause Slideshow
OT1 O 2
MAIN MENU
PHOTO
MAIN MENU SELECTION PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MHAOIT
P NOMENU 111: 0
15: 0P5MPM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSICMUSIC PHOTOPHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Kubr i ck phot os 03
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 01
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIORADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 02
next page.
rd buttons
to move up and down
35
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 23
44of 14 24 / 234
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
Al l Songs
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
OPERATION–PHOTO PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
3a 3b
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS. PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 1O
PH 1:T0O5 PM
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01 VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01
couple seconds. Simply touch the screen to selected photo will appear. Simply touch the
screen ns d buttons
to move up and down ove up and down
view
PHOTO PLAthe icons
Y FUN CTIONSagain. PHOTO PLAY Fscreen UNCTIONSto view the icons again.
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO
4 5
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Si ck Bi k
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 234 24 / 234
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 2
Kur br i ck phot os 02
MUSIC PHOTO
icon to view the list again. Return icon to rreturn to the thumbnail view.
in the same way that the list take you to the photo viewing the Photo View will go to the
the right side and the list tap method to make your
screen navigation works. Tap on screen. H o image in
will go to Thumnail Mode selection
the scroll buttons to change page eturn to the thumbnail view page. the list finishes playback.
You can navigate using the touch
screen or the the hard buttons
to move up and down
36
OPERATION–PHOTO PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
VIEWING A MSLIDESHOW
1 2
AIN MENU SELECTION
MENU
MAINPHOTO * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NTA HVEIG
PAHTOINGLIST MENUS.
TO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
OTO NAVIGATION THE MPAH
IN O
METO LIST ME1N1:0U5 PSM.
NU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU PHOTO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
Kur br i ck pPhHo
OTtOos 02
24 / 234
Kur br i ckMUpSIhC ot os 02PHOTO
Kur br i ck phoHtoolsdMU0S2
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
IC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
With the unit on, press the Menu button; the Touch the PHOTO icon; the Photo
TAP
When making a selection, hold This action will highligThAPt the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the The cO ycnlceefoyrotuhseem
down on the icon. icon. YoPuucsahntahlesoThcu
hmanbgneatilhiecon on hard b Thuetttohnusm tobm
naoilvsecareroeu
nnfu
dnctions icon In thumnail mode use theYsoau m lecetnau pitheomto
s,
cewash
Pu netun
hseeuTstih
humtahbcenkahbialurid
con onr n
Main menu will appear. List screen will appear. Select a photo
Push the Thumbnail icon on The thumbnail screen functions
menu itethme w iththsaidrde b
rig an enMain
ttothnes.lisItn thtuhm
ud thM
ailim
n oedeseanm
useewthaey stahm atethe lO
isnt ce you select a photo, it will
tap method to make your theth takenyegobu to thettpobhnuotottoo view
in the same way that the list tiron works. Ttaapkeon you to the photo viewing Pehoritgoh t sidewain
sVcireew ll d the list
igt othteo bthacek butto
the right side and the list will go to Thumnail Modteap methosd crteoenmnaakveigyoau selection w i l l g o t o T
en. H
h u m n a i l M o d e
3 4
to move up and down
TAP Ar t i st
Al bum
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
Genr e
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
Pl ayl i st VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 4. Buddy Hol l y
Touch the ® icon to start the slideshow. You can pause the slideshow by touching
TAP Push the saTAm P e button to TapTAthP e Now Playing icon at the Push the same button to
The play Button in the center
Push the same button to bottTohm e foofrtwhaerdscarenednreavnedrsitew biullttoTnhe play Button in the center
Push the reverse button to go resume the slideshow
e play Button in the center toggles the slideshow. TPhuesfhorward andrreesvuem rsee tbhuettsolin
deshow
The pictures will display one after another the p icon or pressing the Center button.
Th euim weaaylrlesovw
l cehtahnege evPeursyhatlh teasrkseyeoybuouuttottoomntahtnoeugM
alulysicchangetothgegles the slideshow. Push
o back to the previous image.TThheepim opaguep w diisllscahpaenagrseaefvteerry
gles the slideshow. Push resume the slideshow
t he b ut to n to p au s e t haellsohw
oswy. ou to m an allaygcehw anilg photo to the neenxst. or previous itm heagbeutton to pause the show. 13sseecc. ounndtisl itnheslsidceresehnow is tapped
button to pause the show.
The image will change every
photo to the ne3xsteocrop nrdesviinouslsidimesahgoew backNtow thPelapyrienvgioSucsreim age.
every few seconds and the icons will Touch the ® icon or press the Center
3 seconds in slideshow again.
37
OPERATION–PHOTO PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
You can navigate using the touch
screen or the the hard buttons
to move up and down
5 6
LAY FUNCTIONS
11: 05 P
1M1: 05 PM PHOP
TH
OOTO 11: 0151P: 0M5 PM PHP
OHTOTO 11:1015: 0P5MPM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
bB
ueda
dry.bj pugddy.j pg Bear S
biucdkdByi.kj peg.j pg Bea
Breb
arudbduyd.d
j pyg.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
/ 2234 / 234 24 /25 23/4 234 24 2/4 2/34234 25 / 234 24 / 234
During the slideshow, or when viewing a During the slideshow, or when viewing a
odnreinvethrseecbeuntteorn Push the same button to The forward and reverse button
Pruesshum
the trh
eveesrlsideebsuhtotw
on to go allows you to manually change the PusThhteheporepvu erpsedibssuatp toenartsoagftoer The pop up dissapears after
midaensuhaollw
y .chPaunsh
photo, touch the m or l icon to move to the photo, touch the Landscape icon to cycle
ge the 1 sec. until the screen is tapped
The image will change every bac1k stoect.huenptirletvhieouscsriemeangies .tapped
epxat uosreptrheevisohuosw. age back to the previous image.
im photo to the next or previous image
again. again.
3 seconds in slideshow
previous photo or advance to the next photo. the view back and forth between landscape
and portrait mode.
NOTES:
• See pages 15-21 for information on uploading photo files to this unit.
• While you are browsing your photos, you can touch the Return icon to return to the
previous menu.
• You can listen to music, radio or Audiobook while viewing the pictures. Simply start the
music, radio or Audiobook playback and then enter the Photo mode.
• You can also use the Left/Up, Right/Down and Center buttons instead of the m, l and
® icons respectively to navigate and select the items as shown in the Photo operation.
38
OPERATION–VIDEO PLAYBACK MODE
Scroll down
G List Item 7 Epi sode 18 (hold to make
scrolling faster)
VIDEO SCREEN
Now Playing
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Play/Pause
Slideshow
Button
Previous Video Next Video
TO VIEW VIDEOS
(one Step)
This unit supports the following video formats: AVI-MPEG4: Simple Profile (320x240 resolution 20-
24 fps, 385kbps); WMV: VC-1 Simple Profile (320x240 resolution, 20-24fps, 385kbps *max).
1 2
VIDEO
MAIN MENU
39
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r e
PLAY FUNCTION POP UP Ref er ence. GO
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
OPERATION–VIDEO PLAYBACK MODE
PLAY F(CONTINUED)
UNCTION POP UP * NOTE
3 4
Ref er e
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
VIDEO NAVIGATION THE VIDEO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
Scroll through the list and touch a desired You can pause the video by touching Nowthe
While the pop up is up, press the You can use the back button or
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or the Now Playing will go to the
icon or pressing
this the
button tCenter
o pause the vibutton.
plaTouch
the Video list menu. use the hard buttons to navigate
menu. the scrp
List menu after the last video inThe play button controls the
een will d
and select playback of the video. Press
the pause icon. The v
the list finishes playback.
automatically start playing. Simply touch the the ® icon or press the Center button to
ct deo. yback is stopped.
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
NOTES:
• Videos will playback in landscape format only.
• See pages 15-21 for information on uploading video files to this unit. Hold
• While you are browsing your videos, you can touch the Return icon to return to the
Hold
TAP TAP TAP
2sec 2sec
The playprevious
button controls the menu.
• You can also puse the Left/Up, VRight/Down and Center buttons finstead of the m,Rel and
Now the screen will display The forward button skips The back button skip back plays I f yo u ho l d th e fo r wa rd If you hold the Reverse
playback of the video. Press the pause icon. The video the video ahead to the next the previous video. button down, it will button down, it will
® icons respectively to navigate and select the items as shown in the Video operation.
this button to pause the video. layback is stopped. ideo. ast forward the track. wind the track.
40
OPERATION–VIDEO PLAYBACK MODE (CONTINUED)
FORWARD/REVERSE SKIP
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on
1 2
r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on PLAY FUNCTION POP UP Ref er ence.
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
Ent our age 14 TAP Ent our age 14 Hold Hold TAP TAP
TAP TAP 2sec 2sec
Ent our age 15 Ent our age 15
VIDEpress ATthe
ION Left/Up button) to move the press the Right/Down button) to advance
The forward button skips The back button skip bacEkntp lar aygse 17 If you hold the forward If you hold the Reverse
Ent our age 17 e video ou.m s iw l
the video ahead to the next n buttotnhdeovw w ext eo.
* NOTE! ! : Pl easeth r eisf eb
rut otL
toISnT N
toAVpIG
aAuSTshIeOr eNtkhOeN vNiAdVeIGoA. TIfNaGst foprw
laayrbdacthkeistrsatockp.ped.
move Select the player Ent our aback to lower-numbered Eplayer to higher-numbered files.
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
use the hard buttons to navigate
menuE . nt our age 13 Ent our age 13
and select the list finishes playback.
MUSIC PHOTO
files.
ge 14 nt our age 14
1
TAP
* NSOETTTIE!S! : Pl ease r ef er t o
EnNto
owur Pl aey1
ag i n7g Musi c Scr een f or but t on Ent our age 17
P VOICE AUDIOBOOK NG
Ref er ence.
While the pop up is up, press the You can use the back button or
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or the Now Playing will go to the
back button to return to the list
If yolong
u hold the foas
rward the icon/button
If you hold the Reverse is held. When you
Ref er ence.
will resume.
playback is stopped. Video. fast forward the track. Rewind the track.
1 2
Hold Hold
TAP TAP TAP 2sec 2sec
Auto
Auto Scan
Back (One Step)
RADIO 11: 05 PM
102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
6 Preset Stations
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
6 Preset Stations P1 P2 P3
Scan Backward
P4 P5 P6
Scan Forward
Scan Backward Scan Forward
SCAN
MUSIC
Hold
PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
MUSIC
MUSIC
PHOTO
PHOTO 102.7
MUSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz PHOTO
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
P1 P2 P3
RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
P4 P5 P6
NOW PLAYING
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING
TUNING GO
42
RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
SCAN 4 of 14 SCAN
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
3 4110022.6.6
NUAL TUNING MMAANNUUAALLTTUUNNIN
INGG
AR ADIO 11: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO :1015: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11:1015: 0P5MPM
M MAIN MENU
OAIN MENU 11: 051P:1015: 0P5MPM
1M RD
RA IDOIO 111:10:505PM RADIO IO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM11: 05 PM RADIORADIO 11: 05 1P1M IO
FM1
M F F F FM1
M1
1 F F
SAS
CNAC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCAN SCS
AC
NAN
SC SCAN SCAN SCANSCAN
102.7
MUM
SUICSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz
PHP
OHTO
OTO
111000222..67
KiK
.7
ssi sF
sM FM
mm
m hz
hzhz 10211.06022.6
.6 m hz m hmzhz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz m hmzhz 1011200.272.7
.7 Ki ss FM
Ki ssKFi sMs FM
m hz
m hz m hz 110022.7
.7
KiKssi sF
sM FM
m hmzhz
TA
TAPP RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
P4 P5 P6 P4 P4P5 P5 P5P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
P4 P5 P6 P4P4 P5P5 P6P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P6
VOV
ICOEICE AUA
DU DBIO
IO OB
OOKOK SES
TE
TITNTG
IN
SGS SCAN SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
NN
OOWWPP
LLAA
YY
ININ
GG
102.7 Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
Select a station by pressing the m or l Mute the sound by touching the indicator.
p the radio icon to activate the
mtahneuraaldlyiotuicnoenatnodalcotcivaateteathe TaTp
P1 P2 P3
aptotomm anan
uualalyllytutu
nne ean
an
ddlolo
cactaetea aTap to manually tune and locate a Tap TtahTp
P1 P2 102.7
aeptm
otoumtm aicn
ean uou
99.1
anlalytlloytuttou
ngn
101.1
egealn
eandsd
oloulo
102.7
cnacdtaeteaTaheTaiTcp
aoptnhtw
h
e eim
llm
u
chu 99.1
teatenicgioceo
ninn
tottoh
101.1
toteo
gm g
gg
102.7
luelteseosouu nn
dd ThTh
e eicioco
nnww
99.1
illilcl hchan an
gg
101.1
e eininthth
102.7
e emmuu tete
dio.
eoq.uency rard
adioiofrferq
equuen
en cycy ioLDfrequency. rard adioiofrferq
equu enencyc.y. bbuu
tttotonnaraeraeatotoinin dd
iciactaetesoso
uu nn
ddisisoonn
TAP
NOTE: See below for Auto Scan. buttons to resume the sound.
Assigning preset manually can be The current station will be auto- After the preset stations have The selection will be highlighted
TUUNNIN
INGG accomplished by tap and hold on
M1
FMTO
matically stored in the seleFMcted M1M1 been set simply tap on them toFMT
TO MAchIaNngM ENU nM
O aMd tAeIN
AhIN staM
MtiEoEnNN
wiU
Ull change.
the available slot slot. e the station.
RADIO
DIORADIO 11M:1015: 0P5MPM
11: 05 P RADIR
RADIO
OADIO
1015: 0P5MPM
11: 0511P:M RADIO RAR
DA DIO
IO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RAR
RADIO DA DIO
IO :1015: 0P5MPM
11: 051P1M RAR
DA DIO
IO 11:1015: 0P5MPM MAM
INAIM
NEM
NEUNU 11:1015: 0P5MPM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
1
m hz m hz m hmzhz m hz PHOTO m hmzhz MUM
SUICSIC PHP
OHTO
OTO
m hz m hz m hzm hz m hz m hz MUSIC
TATPAP
m hz
Ki ss FM K-aErat h r th K-KE-aErat h r th Ki ss FM TAP KiKssi sF
sM FM
K- EaKritshs FM K- EKa-rE
th Ki ss FM Ki ssKFi sMs FM
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2P3 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3
previous menu.
P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3 P1 P1 P2 P3
RADIO VIDEO RAR
DA DIO
IO VIDVEID
OEO
HHolodld
Ki ss FM Kost KBi g
TAP
actaetethth
e ennexetxtstsrtoro
nn gg esetstrard
adioio locate the next strongest radio radiloolo
cactaetethth e enn exetxtstsrtoro nn gg esetstrard ad ioio therarm
ad
d iaoiion screen. thth
e emmaianinscsrcereen
en..
ANTENNA
Touch the AutosctaalltyScan
ions, pausingicon
momentarand the unit will The headphones act as an antenna for FM.
Auto scan mode will automati- The scan will stop everytime they It will stop when you press It will stop when it reaches the
The scan begins at the station you It pauses for 3 SECONDS between Extend the headphone wire for best FM
ily hard button. not pressed to stop it.
available station.
before finding the next.
reception.
are currently on. It only requires stations
a tap to initiate.
43
OPERATION–FM RADIO MODE (CONTINUED)
TO ADD AND SELECT PRESETS (UP TO SIX)
1 2
RADIO
RADIO ASA
SISGSNIGIN
NGINPGRP
ESRETSET SELSECLETC
INTGING
PRP
ESRETSET
RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
A A SCAN A SCAN
AN A A
SCAN SC
SA
CNAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz
Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7
D D
HOL HcOL c
2 Se2 Se
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9
TAP TAP
previous page. Touch and hold one of the icon and it will be automatically tuned.
accoam ccpolm lidshbeydtb hon matm n emt psilm
y tpalpy toanptohnem otantw
ioinll w
chilal nch
gaen ge.
the tahveaialavbalielasblloet slot slot.slot. chanch
gaentg
he tshtaetisotant.ion.
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10130.5
3.5
Kost Kost
m hz m hz 10140.3
4.3 KBi g KBi g
m hz m hz 10180.0
8.0 m hz m hz
TARPi cT
kA
DRP
ei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Sl ow jSalm
ows j am s TAP TAP
Sof t RSoocfkt Rock
OROR
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
44
OPERATION–VOICE RECORDER MODE
List Item 5 08/ 19
Record Icon
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
List Item 6 08/ 19
VOICE SCREEN
Go to Music NOW PLAYING List Item 7 08/ 19
Now Playing
Recording Screen
Record/Stop
RecorButton
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE
d button Back
00: 27 / 03: 25 (one Step)
00/
00:00 : 3100:00
08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM
RECORD
TO RECORD
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
00: 27 / 03: 25
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO RADIO RADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO
00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 1E
2: 45 PM AUDIOBOOK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOIC SETTINGS
TAP NOWNP
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING OLW
AYPILNAGYING NOW PLAYING
45
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
G
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC00: 27 / 03: 25 11: 05 PM 00: 27 / 03: 25
4 of 14
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
OPERATION–VOICE RECORDER MODE (CONT.)
3 4
Touch the Record (q) icon to start recording. When done recording, touch the Stop ( X )
Speak into the microphone, located at the icon.
lower left side of the unit) and the player will
create a voice recording.
5 6
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
RECORD
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM
00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
00: 27 / 03: 25
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TA
: 2P8PM TA
00: 31 / 02: 29 TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12
TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 120:02:83P
1M/ 02: 29 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 2P8PM
00: 31 / 02: 29
08/ 19/ 2008 0088
/ 1/91/ 2 08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 90/028008 12: 45PM
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45P
12:M
15 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
MUSIC PHOTO
46 RADIO VIDEO
7 8
While playing back the recorded voice, During playback, touch and hold the m or l
touch the p icon to pause. Touch the ® icon to move the player forward or
icon again to resume playback. backward within a recording.
47
OPERATION–VOICE RECORDER MODE (CONT.)
TO DELETE A RECORDING
1 2
RECORD
DELETE RECORDING
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 11: 05 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM DELETE? 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM
08/ 19/ 2008
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM TAP
NO YES YES
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TAP
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM
TAP 00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
TAP
12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM OK 08/ 19/ 2008 01: 25PM
TAP
While in the
recordVoice Recording
buttons ormode,
the touch screetouch Select a recording
using the touto
ch scredelete; awill confirmation
This will bring you to a delete Once the action is completed it
Tap the trash icon to delete a
the Trash icon; the Voice recording List will screen will bappear. At the recoconfirmation
screen. Using either the hard take you back to the delete
ing. n en or hard
NOTES:
• You can also use the Left/Up, Right/Down and Center buttons instead of the m, l and
® icons respectively to navigate and select the items as shown in the Video operation.
• Adjust the volume as shown on page 24.
48
OPERATION–AUDIOBOOK MODE
AUDIOBOOK SCREEN
Toggle Full Book
Cover Art Back (One Step)
TO VIEW ANMAAUDIOBOOK
1 2
MAIN MENU
IN MENU SELECTION
AUDIOBOOK
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r
NAVIGATING AUDIOBOOK MENU THE AUDIOBOOK
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM AUDIOBOOK 11: 05 PM
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOAIC
UE
DIOBOOKAUDIO
SB
ET
OTOIK
NGS SETTINGS Nor wegViOaICnE WoAoUd
DIOBOOK SETTINGS
NOW N
PO APYI NG
LTA
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING W PLAYING Nor wegi an WN
oOodW PLAYI NG
TAP
49
Ref er ence. G
AUDIOBOOK 11: 05 PM AUDIOBOOK 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
4 of 14
Now Pl ayi ng 00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
00: 27 / 03: 25
OPERATION–AUDIOBOOK MODE (CONTINUED)
3 4
Scroll through the list and touch a desired You can pause the book by touching the p
Audiobook name; the Audiobook will icon or pressing the Center button. Touch
automatically open and start playing. the ® icon or press the Center button to
resume audiobook playback.
5 6
Touch the m or l icon to go to the previous Touch the > or < icon to go to the previous
or next chapter. A popup screen will appear or next title.
to confirm the change of chapters. Select
YES to go to the next chapter or NO to
resume the previous playback position.
50
OPERATION–AUDIOBOOK MODE (CONTINUED)
NOTES:
• It will save all the latest playback position of each book. So it can resume to the latest
playback position of each book.
• See pages 15-21 for information on uploading Audiobook files to this unit.
• You can touch the Return icon to return to the previous menu.
• You can pause playback by touching the p icon or pressing the Center button. Touch
the ® icon or press the Center button to resume.
• You can also use the Left/Up, Right/Down and Center buttons instead of the m, l and
® icons respectively to navigate and select the items as shown on the previous two
pages.
• Adjust the sound as shown on page 24.
51
SETTINGS MENU
ENTERING MTHE SETTINGS MENU
1 2
SETTINGS
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease
NAVIGATION
AIN MENU SELECTION MAIN MENU MAIN MENU
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
SET TINGS NAVIGATION
MAIN MENM
U AIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU
SETTINGS
THE SETTINGS L
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
1 2
G
*N
*N OO
TTEE! !!:! :PPl el e
aa ser er e
se f ef e
r rt ot oLL
ISIS
TTNN
AAVVIG
IGAA TTIO
IONNOO
NNNN
AAVV
IG IG
AATTININ
GG
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
BVRIG
V IIG ATTTIO
GAH IOENN
N SS TT
HH
MAIN MENU
EESSEETT TT INI1NG G
S
1: 05SPML I ST MENUS.
LIST MENUS. MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM BRIGHTMN
USIE
C SS 11: 05 PM
BRIGHTNESS
4 of 14
N1o1:w
05 PP
M la yi ng
111: 011
5: 01P
: 05
5M EPTM
PSM TINGS 11: 05SP
EMTTIN
SGES
TTINGS
SETTINGS
1E1T: 0
S TI5NP
1M
G1: 05 PM
S
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SESTETSTIE
NTTSINGS
TIG
NGS SETTINGS 111: 0
15: 0P
5MPM 11: 05 PM SETS
TEIN
TGTISNGSSETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 0151:P0M
11: 05 PM
511P:0M5 PM SETST
EITN
TIG
NSGS BA1C
1:10:K
1 50PLIGHT
5MPM SETTINS
00: 27 / 03: 25
GESTTI NGS 11:05 PM 11: 05 PM
S BRIGHTNESS
BB
RR IG
IGHH
BTRT
NNEHE
SSSESSS IBGIRH NSEA lSlIGS
HToNn gSs BB
RR IG
IGHHTBT
NRN
EESHS
S SREIGSHSTNESS 6 1
IG TN BRIGHTNESS BB
RR GIH
GN
T HN
T TS
EE SR
B
S ES IG TBN BBRRIIG
GH
HT
TNNEESSSS
POWER SAVINGS
BRIGHB
TN
REIG
SS
HTNESS
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
BACKLIGHT ROCK SHUFFLE
5
BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT
5 2
PHOTO 6 1
T6AP 1
66 6 11 1
Ar6t i st 1
6
6
1
1 6
6
1
SE1 T TIME
6 1
6 1
PHOTO
POWER SAVINGS TA
TAPP
INGS PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAVVIN
INGGSS 5 5 2 5 Al bu6m 2 PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAV5VIN
INGGS6S 2 5 5 2 5 2 2
3 3
SET TIME 5 5 2
RADIO VIDEO
55 5 65 5 22 2 5 6 2 RADIO VIDEO
5 5 LANG
2 UAGE 5 2 2
SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3
Ge3 nr e 3 SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3 3 3 3 3
VIDEO LANGUAGE
VIDEO
3 3 33 3 33 3 3 3 3 DE
3 FAULT Weezer 3 3
TAP The Bl ue Al bum
DEFAULT LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE Pl ayl i st LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE 4. Buddy Hol l y
TA
FORMATP OK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
AUDIOBOOK
DIOBOOK
SETTINGS
FORMAT
SETTINGS DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT NOW PLAYING
OK OK DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT OK NOW PLAYING OK OK
You can use the Hard Buttons
P
OO
WWPPLLAA
YY ITNG KO
KK
TA
ITN G FF
OORR
MM TTOK
AA OO FFOO
RRMM AA TT OK
TAP
You can also chO anKge the setting toOcKycle through the Brightness
AAPP
You can use the Hard Buttons
to cycle through the Brightness You can also cT ha an pgtehteheNsoew ttinPglayinbgy idciorenctalyt p
threessing on the level settings of which there are 6
TAP
mTsAPoonf tthhee scrYeoeuncaanndailtsowcilhl ange the setting
Enter the Settings menu as shown above. Touch the desired Brightness level (1-6,
YYooYuouu ccaacnn an unsnaevativh
gigeataH e atttrhtidnhegeBssucsortcfetro
stee eenen
w hsn
ichutshin
using erge arPeu6sh the back button to return
Push the back button to return by touching thbeoatrtro ow levels.
ttohtcheyetcotlo chrsocsurcegreehenletnh
euucth
h veelsB. rightness
yoyouutotoththeelislits.t. You canboatltsoomcohfatnhgeaeslcw
trheaeeynssO
ettRatiknegyou tboytd hiereM ctulysipc ressing on the level
TAP
setting screen will appear. The Brightness When finished, touch the OK icon.
setting will adjust the overall brightness of
the display.
NEESSSS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
E
SSSS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS
BR BR BR BR BR
H
TT
6 1 6 1
52
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
6 1 6 1 6 1
A
VV IN
INGGSS
5
5
55 2
2
5
5
66 2
2
5
5
66 2
2 5
5
55 2
2
5
5
22 2
2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
E
SETTINGS MENU (CONTINUED)
ADJUSTING GTHT THE BACKLIGHT
1 2
T
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
HT BABCAKCLKILGIH
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC G
ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF
ON ON ON ON ON
INGS BABCAKC
LKIG
LH
IG
THT
HT 15 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 3
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
15 3 15 15 15 15 3
LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF ALAWAYLS
WAYS seO FF LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF sec ALWA LS
ALY WAYSOFF O FF LS
ALWAY WAYSO
sec OsFeFc OsFeFc sec AYS OFOF FFc OsFeFc eANcYS OsFeFc
H
SATVINGS
11: 05 PM
BABCPAKOPC
LOKIEW
W
SETTINGS
ISRGATSsVH
GRLEH ec
A
INV
ALWAYS
TGINSGS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
OO
LW
N
ON
NON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON sO
W
O
N
11: 05 PM
ON ON
10 5 10
1s5ec 1
se5c 3 15 1155
sec
1L5W
A 15c5YS 3 33
seA
10
1515 15AA
sec
LW L5Y
LAW
A W
seA
SAYS3 3 3
c YS
10
15 1155ALW
sec ALW
AALY
W5
ScAYYSS3 33
seA
10
15 1155ALW
sec
AA LY
W5
SAYS3 33
s3
ec
15 15 3
S sec sec
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sseecc
secON sec sec sseecc sescecsec
OO
NN ON sescecsec sec sseecc
ONO ONN sec sseecc sec sseecc
ON ON sec sseecc
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sec
secs
E 11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
SET
ST
TIEME
SG
EITNTIEN
STG
TS
INGS 11: 05 PM SETSINTSG
TE TES
BACKLIGH
ITNTGIN
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM NS
SESTETTIT ES
IG
NGTS
BACKLIGH
TINGS
T P1M
111:10:505 1:M
P 05 PM SETS SG
TIENTTES
ITNTG
IN
BACKLIGH
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM SIENS
SETT E
TSITNTG
TG IN
SGS 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
10 5 10 1100 5 55 1010 10 55 5 10 1100 5 55
TAP 10 1100 5 55 10 10
ESS LALNAGNU GAUG
BAAG
E E
sec sec
BAB
CA
sec sseecc
KBC
LAK
IC
GLK LTIHGTHT
HIG
sec sseecc
BB
AACC
sescecsec
KBK
LAL
IC
G KLTITGHT
HH
sescecsec
BAB
CAKBC
LAK
IC
GLK
s
sec secec sec sseecc
LTIHGTHT
HIG BAC
BK
sec sec sec sseecc
BL
AIKC
s
GLK
e c
HILG
TIH
GTHT
sec sec
BACKBLAIC
GK
H
s
GE ALWAYS
CK LIGHT
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
IG
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
A C
OFF
TAPTAP
ON ON ON ON ON
HN
TGS BACBKALCIKGL
HITGH T TAP
DED
FEA15F TL1O
UALU T5K 3 AALYW
15 ALW ASLAA
WY
AYS
OK 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 AA LW
LAW
OK
AYAAA Y
WS
SYLS 3
AYOSFOFFF OFF
AALYW
15 ALW
OK
ASLAA
WY
AYS 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 ALWAYASL3WAYS
OK 3 ALWAYASLWAYOSF
sec ALWAYS OFsF
ec sec ALW YS sec sec LW sec sec ALW YS sec sec ALWAYS OFFOFsO
FFF
ec
sOe
Nc ON OONNON ON
ON ON
ON ON OONN ON ON s
Oe cN
NO ON ON
AVINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GIS NGS TAP
You cFaonF rumosreamt1t51h
a0 te Ha1O r55dKBut3tons 15 15 1015 A1O KO
L5W 1K
5A OK
Y5S 3 3 3 151510 1 A5A
LWLO
W O
A K
Y
5
A
O
LK
YWSK
S AYS33 3 You can a15ls1o A5c
101
5 AO
Lh
W La
AWK
n
YLOOgK
W
5S
A
KeSYtS3he
YA 3 3setting 15 15 101A5LWAY OKO
L3S OK
WAYS
5 K
3 3 3 15 15 3 KO
O
escec sec sec sescescec sec
sec sec secsec You can alssesocesceccsh
ec
aOnONsNg
ec
eONthsesececsseectting sec sescec sec sec sec sec sesce
scec sec
ON ON sec secsec sec sec
to cyScEleTStTE hIT
rM osTuE IgMhEth seec Bacskelcight secON by directlysepc reOsNsOinNOgN onsetcheTAlPeTvAPel sT
eAcP sec s
by touching t1h01e0 a10rro5 5ws5 on thTeAP
Enter the Settings menu as shown on page Touch the desired BacklightOK time. Select
setYtionugscaonf w usheicts1heh0c ethHears5eercdaBreut6tons YouYocuancaunseusts1eeh0c e1t0hsHeaH a5rBd5uBttuotntos ns
5rd
anegtehTetAhsPe tsteinttging
10
sec ec sec secsec sescec sec sescec sec
10
You can as1e0lcss1oe0csecchs5eac sn5ecg
5
sece the setting
Yocuancaanlssa1oe0clssc1eo0h
You acn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
10 5 5 5
csec sec secsec
10
sec
10 5
sec se
botYtooumco f tahlesosccrheaenngO eRthe setting You Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn hg
E levteoL c. yNLcG
lsA lAeU
NtA hGG rUoEAuGghE the Backlight to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethBeacBkalcigkh ligt ht an by directly pressing on the level bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein ssgTin
Aog
Pnotn
hethlevlelvel TA
52. YTouch BACKLIGHT; the Backlight OOKKOOFF toYohave the KeKthebacklight always off.
bybtoy utoch
uicnhgintghethaerraorw roswosnotnhethe
setsteinttgins gosf o
wfhwichhicth eth reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the TAPTAP
eeOnROTRAP
settings of which there are 6
elFsDA. EUFLATULOTK OK bottom of tO hKe screen OR thf eO
thK
leDvE levlelvse. ls. bobttootmtom
of o secrsecern
settingPsleeOvPtetiW
nwill
gs of whicadjusth there are 6 the time chhtichhethe
rteheare a6re 6display’s
by directly pressing on the level TAP TAP TAP
setYto csaonf u YouYcoauncuasneuth rd ns by touching the arrow s on the ncaaln acnhgaentghee tsheettsineg
tting
VINGS levteolsc. ycle through the Backlight to ctyoclceytchlerotu
hgrohutghhe tBhaecB ckhltight boYttooumcaonf tahlseosch
klaig e Rthe setting YoubYycoadunirceaacln
reaenngO stolayclp
shoacnhgaentghee tsheettsineg
tting
ressing on the level by dbiyredcitrleycptlryespsriensgTsAionPng tohne tlh
eveelel vel TA
S POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS
SIN
SETTS ETTINGS 11: 051111
P::M
05 PM TSEET TINGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M SETTSET TINGS 11: 05111
P: 05 PM
1:M
SETT SIG
NGS 11:10151: 01
P5:M
05 PM SETSTESIT
ET TINGS 11:151:1
01 P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
ETGTSINGS SETS IN
TGTS INEG
TS SET
ST
EITNTG NTGIS
ADJUSTING
11: 05 PM
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS
1 2
P
15OWER SAVI NGS POP
W
1PO
EW
5O WES
R ERA
RV
SSIAN
AVV
IIN
G NGGSS
S P
15O
POW
P EW
OR E
WSR
EARVS A
AV
SIN GIIS
V N
NGGS
S PO
PW
15PW
OOW
ER EA
S
ERRSVA
SIV
AIV
N NIS
G N
GSGS POP5P
1WOO
E W
WR E
ESRSVS
RA A
VV
AIN NIS
IG N
GGSS PO
POW WS
ER EA
R
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
min min min min min
VHNITN
GSGS BABCAKC
LKIG
LH
IG
THT
10 10 1 10 15 1 10 15 1 10 15 1 10 1 1
15 1155 O 15 1155 15 1515 15 1515 15 15
mFi nF
min 15
m in
min
min
OFF
min
m i nm n OFFOFF
miin
min
min
min m min
min
i n OFF OOmFFFFi n min
m im inni n
nm im
Fm
OFO Oi n
FF
FF min
m i nmmi ni n
min
OiFnF
OFFOm
FF min min
AAVVININGSGS POPPW
11: 05 PM O EW
OPWOR
EW
REESRAASSVVAIANIVNV
SR G IGNSGS
G
INS
SETTINGS
5 2
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
5
10 1100
2
10m11
11: 05 PM
0 1 11
SETTINGS
5
10 1100 15 m 1125
11: 05 PM
1 1
SETTINGS
5
10 1010
11: 05 PM
15m12i51 5 1 11
SETTINGS
5
10 1010
2
15m1
11: 05 PM
15 1 1 1 10 10 1
1
m0i n 1i0n
m 1 min i5
n min i5n 1 min n min in
S min
OWER SAVm INi1nG
min m i nmmi ni n
POWER SAVm
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min m in
m i n m i nm i n m i n m i n
m i nGS
min m i nm im
POWER SAVm
n
in
m i ni n m i n m i nm imn i n m i nmm
in
POWER SAVm
in
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min min
m i nm
11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
NSTG
SETTSIE
P
ETSTIN
TIGNSGS
S 1:05 PM
1: 0511P1:M
05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTSESG
IN TET
P
STIT
NIG
O
NS
W
GS
E R S A V I N
11:M
11: 051P 1
0:50P
5MPM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING1S 1: 05 P1M
1: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
5 55 2 22 5 5 2 2 5 55 2 22 5 55 2 22 5 5
SS BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
5
min
2
min m i nmmi ni n m i nmmi ni n min m
5
in
min min min
2
min m i nm im
n
in m i nm im
n TAP
in m i nmm
in
in m i nmm
in
in min min
GE LALNAGNUG AU
P1GAE
5OWGEE
R SAVINGS
OFF
POP
W PEO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
15OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
P1P
POW EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
PO
P1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POP1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POWP
EO
RW EV
SAR
min min min min min
NTGS BACBKALCIK
GLHITGHKT TAP TAPTAP
DED
FEAF10A
U LUTLTO10 15 1 10 15 115515
OK 1 10 15 115155
OK 1 10
OK
15 1155 15 1 10
OK
15 151 15 1 15 15
OF
mFi n OFF OFF OFF
OFF OF i nF OFF OFF OFF OFF min O
min
mi ni n
m min
i ni n OFmFi n
mi nm
m i nm m i n m i n mm
mi niinn m min
mi ni nm i n OFmFi n
min
m min
ni n OFmFi n
mi nim
m i nm min
VINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GISNGS TAP
YouFcO aF nROMuRsAeMTm1tmA T 1O
05he Ha 20K
rd Bumt1itnons 10 10510 1O
0K O
1m
O KK
251 0 1 1 1 OKO OK K
10 10150 15 125 15 1 1 1 You can alms10ionm1m0in5cinm1h0ina1n K25O
O51g
O
m ie
K1K
5 1 1 1
n the setting
10 105 10 1 O5K O O1K
12 K 5 1 1 1 10 10 1 KO
O
nTiA
i ni n min m i nmm i ni n in m i n mm
i niinn m i n m m i n P m i nm i nm i n
i nm
m im
min min min
n i n min
m
mi ni nm i n mm
i ni n m i n m i nm i nm i n m i n m i nmm
i nim
n in
m im min min min
min m
to cSyEcTlS eTEtIhTMrToEIuM gE h tmhien Power You can also chanmgien the setting by directly pressinmgi non the TlAePvTAePl n
savYin 5
erame2irndarBeu6ttons Yocuancaunseumst5e tinmhHineam2H
5 5 2
a2 rBdinuBttuotntos ns by touching mt5ihn e5ma5inrmr2ion w2ms2in on thTeAP 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5
og uscoafnwuhseicmthihn tehH You ih
nme irnd You can alsmoinmicn mhinamninmginemT Yocuancaanlsaomlsicnmoh cinhn mg
ainnemigntmehinethse tsteinttging
anegteheA
m i nm min min thPe setting You
in i na
m
TAP
min
T
min m
E levtLeolAsc.NLyG ANGG
clUeAth
UEAGE
rough the Power to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethPeoP woew r er botYtooumcof tahlesosccrheaenngO
an eRthe setting Yobu Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
y directly pressing on the level
hg thse tsteinttging bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein s sg i nognotnhethlevlelvel
bybtoy utoch
uicnhgintghethaerraorw roswosnotnhethe
savsianvgins gosf o
wfhwichhicth eth reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the TAPTAP
eeOnROTR AP
sDaEvFiD nAE
gUFsLAoTUfw LO ThKich there are 6 O K
levels. levlelvse. ls. bottom of thOeKscreen OR bobttootmtom
of o thf etOhsKecrsecern OK
Enter the Settings menu as shown on page Touch the desired Power Saving time.
to cycle through the Power TAP by directly pressing on theTlAePveTAlP
YouYcoauncuasneuth see tHhaerd
HaBrudttBountstons by touching the arrows on the You can also change the setting YouYcoauncaaln soaclshoacnhgaentghee tsheettsineg tting
savYionugscaonf w
usheicthhethHearerdarBeu6ttons TAP TA
levteolsc. ycle through the Power to ctyoclceytchlerotu
hgrohutghhe tPhoewPeorwer boYttooumcaonf tahlseosch e Rthe setting YobuyYco
reaenngO u caaln
dain
rectslo
alsoacnhgaentghee tsheettsineg
y pch
tting
ressing on the level by dbiyredcitrleycptlryespsriensgsionng tohne tlh
eveelel vel
52. Touch POWER SAVING; the Power Select OFF to disable Auto Power off.
savings of which there are 6 savisnagvsinogfswohf iw
chhtichherteheare a6re 6 by touching the arrows on the by tboyuctohuincghitnhge tahreroawrrsoowns tohne the
levels. levelelsv. els. bottom of the screen OR bottboomttoom f thoef tshceresecnreOeRn OR
Saving setting screen will appear. This sets When finished, touch the OK icon.
the amount of time the unit will stay on
before turning off due to inactivity.
53
SETTINGS MENU (CONTINUED)
the Minute change from AM and PM. hour
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
TIME SET TIME SET
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTISNEGTSTINGS 11: 051P1M
: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS 111: 0: 055PPMM SEST
SET
ETITN
TTIG SG
INNGSS 111:10115::00P55MPPM
M SS
SE
E ETTT
T IIN
ITN GG
N SS
GS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS
ESS SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
1112
SET TIME
0055 PPM 11
251 LDTIME
SET
HO
005065 PP
MM
P M 1
321 0055
25 PM SE1
T1TIME 05 AM 1111 4055 APMM S1
E2T TIME05 PM M
T TAP TAP TAP TA
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
AVINGS
D
HOL
DE
1F
1AULT05 DE1F2AULT 05
D PM 12 05 PM PM 11 06 PM 11 05 AM
HOL TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP
OK FORMAT OK OO
KK FORMAT OK O
OKK OO
KK
OK OKK
O
E
Enter tthe
ime chanSettings menu as shown on page Touch the Hour’s up arrow or down arrow to
TAP
rrow to go Back in TU
apsinthgetu
hpeh
ararrodwbtuottaodnvsaynocue cthan
e Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrroow
w ttoo aaddvvaannccee tthhee TTaTap
apptththh
eeedduoopw anraraorrrw
wn twotto
roow aodggvoaonBBcaaeccktkhiinen TTaapp tthhee ud upopwoarn
rrdoaow
rrwotn
hsoeutrtheTtAP e but without control the hour
im hMoiunrute TAP tthh
heoehuMor iu
Rnraupteidly TAP ctM
hieannhugoteeufrrRoampiAdM ly a
52. Touch
Tap the up arroSET
w to advanceTIME;
the Tap the dothe
wn arrow Time
to go Back in setting
Tap the up arrow toset
advancethe
the THour.
ap the down Press
arrow to go Baand
ck in Tahold
p the up orto
downset
arrow tothe hour
idly Tap the OK button to confirm the
OK over individuO aK
l hrs or mins. It will OK OK OK
ge
just cycle through.
3 4
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS 111: 0: 055PPMM SESTETTIN
TIG
NSGS 111: 015: 0P5MPM S
SEETTTTIIN
NGGS
S 1111::0055 P
PMM SES
TETTTG
IN INSGS
E
TT
IMTEIME SETLTDSEET TIME SETSTEIM
TE
TIME SETDSTETETIME
HOL0350
SET TIME IM SET TIME SET TIME IM SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
5 HO 05 PM 3 05 PM 52
1 PPD
LM
M 311 02
55 PP
MM 121 3005 AD
P M 111 25
45
HO HOL
1OLD30 06 1P PM 11 HOLD05
D
505 1P1MPM 05 PM 3 12 05 05 1P2M PM 05 12 1H MPM 05
2D PM 11 11 25 05 1P1MAM 06 L1D
HO1A M AM11 45 AM
HOL
PM 05
TAP TAP TAP
OK OK O
OKK OO
KK OK OO
KK
TAP
Dw to advance the
Tap the upHaOrLro vvD TUapsin
thgetdhoewhnaradrrbouw
HOL
Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrrooww ttoo aadd aannccee tthhee TTaapptthheeddoow wnnaarrrroow
wttooggooBBaacckkiinn Tap the up arrow to advance the
TAP TAP TAPtthheehM ThA
teP O thseetM
thineuttim eabpuid
t lw
hour Rapidly TAP the hour Rapidly hMoiunruRteapRiadplyidly oiunruRteapRiadplyidly TMap
intu RaKpbidultyton to confirm the eR y
OKOK OK OK OK OK OKOK OK OK OK OK OK OK time change OK over individual hrs
just cycle through
Touch the Minute’s up arrow or down arrow Touch the AM/PM’s up arrow or Down arrow
TAP
devtuaopngcaoerrBtohawecktoinaTdavpTaatnhpceeth
dteo up or down arroBwactkoin Using the hard buttons you can
w
Taatp
rorotahwdevtuo
apngcaoerrBtohawe
cktoinaTd
apvaTtnahcpeetdh
tohew
eunpaarTrarop
owwthttoeogdaoodw
B cakcreirnoth
vann wetoTagpToatBp
haetchukepindaorrwonw
Taatprortoahw hwe n arTraopwthtoe gdoown arrow to go Back in Tap the up or down arrow to
the Mhoinuur tReapidltyhe hour Min thueteMRin ap uitdely Minute thecM hainnugteefRroam AlM
pitdh and PM.
ey Minute Tap the OK buttcohnatnogceofnrofim heand PseMt .the time but without control
rmAtM
to set the Minute. Press and hold to set the to set the unit to AM or PM.
hour
time change over individual hrs or mins. It will
just cycle through.
minute rapidly.
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS
SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
30 3 OPD
M
H L 05 PM 11 25 12 PM 30 PD
HOL
M 11 05 11 AM 25 PM 11
54
45 11AM 05 AM 11 45 AM
SETTINGS MENU (CONTINUED)
5 SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11:05 PM
6
11 25 PM 11 05 AM 11 45 AM
3
HOL
D 1 2
OK OK OK
TAP
Using the hard buttons you can
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
GE LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
11: 05 PM SETTINSS
G
EES
TTTTIINNGGSS 11: 05 P11M
11::0055PPM
M SES
TE
TITNTS
IN
G GTSINGS
EST 11:1015: 0P51M1P:M
05 PM SETTINS
G
SES
ETTTTIIN
NGGSS 11: 05 P1M
111::0055PPM
M SETSTEINGIES
TT
S NTG
TS
INGS 11: 0151:P
01M
51P
: 0M5 PM SETTS
ING
ES STIN
TE
T TIGNSGS 11: 051P
11:M
015: 0P5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
ESS BRIB
GH
RITGNHETSNSESS LANGLLUA
LANGUAGE LALN
AGNLU
G
AAUA
NGGEG
UEAGE AAN
NGG
EU
G UA
AGGE
E LALNAGN
LUA
GAN
UGG
AEU
GA
EGE LANLG
LU
A AAN
N GG
GEA
U UGAE
GE LANGLUA
GS
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
T BACBKALCIG
KEH
LNITG
GLH
IST
H SPANISH ENGLISH ENGLISH SPANISH
AVINGS POW
PEOR
WSEA
RVSS
IPN
AGVISNGS SP SP SP SP
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
ENGLISH ENSG
PL
AEIN
NIH
S SL
G HISH SPANS
IS
EPNH
AGNLIIS
SHH ENEGNLE
IS
GNLH
IGSLHISH ENG
SLP
EIA
S
NNH
GILSIH
SH SPANSI
SETSTEIT
MTEIME
SP SPSP SP SP S
SPP SPSTPAP
SP SP SP
SP SP
E LANLG AUNAGGUEAGE
OK OK OK OK OK
DEFD AEUFLATULT TAP TAP TAP TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
to cyFcO leRtFM
hOrA
oTuMgAhTtheOLKanguage
R OOKKOK You can also chaOnKgeOK the setting by directly pressin OgK OoKOnKthe O TK
AO POKK OK
settings of which there are 3 by touching the arrows on the Language
Enter the Settings menu as shown on page Touch the desired Language.
TAP TAP TAP
leveYlso. u can use the Hard Buttons YouYcoaun cuasne uths e tHhaerdHaBrudttBountstons bottom of the screen OR You can also change the setting YouYcoaun caalsnoaclshoanch gaentg he tsheettisnegtting
to cycle through the Language to cytoclceytchlerotuhgrohutghhe tLhaeng
Launagueage Yo u c a n a l s o c h a n ge the setting YoubYycoadunirceaaclsntolyaclpshoraencsh
g e
a t
n h
g e s
t
sing on theheet t i
s n
e g
t t i n g by dbiryed esgsTo
ctirlyecptrlyespsrin iAnnPgtohne the T
52. Touch LANGUAGE; the Language When finished, touch the OK icon.
settings of which there are 3 settisnegttsinogf swohficwhhtih
chertehaere 3are 3 by touching the arrows on the by Ltab
onu
ygcthuiu
o angcgh etinhge tahrreoawrrsoownstohne the Lang Launagu eage
levels. levellesv. els. bottom of the screen OR bottboomttom f thoef tshcreesecnreOeRn OR
T DED
FAEU
FALTULT
55
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
11: 05 PM SSEETTTTIN GG
INSESS
TTINGS 1111: 0
: 055PP
1MM
1: 05 PM SETTINS
GE
S ESTTTTIIN
NGGS
S 11: 05 P11M
11::0055 P
PMM SETTIS
NEGT
SESTITNIN
GS
GS 11: 05 1P11M
:10:505PM
PM SETTSIE
NTGTESITNTGIN
S SGS 11: 01
51P:10
M15: 0
P5MPM SETTS
INES
G
TES
TTIN
TIG
NSGS 11: 051P
11M
:0
15: 0P
5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
ESS BRIB
GH
RITGNHETSNSESS DEFAD
UE
DEFAULT D ELF
TA
F AU
ULLT
T DEFD
AD
U
EELF
FTAUU
A LL
TT DEF
DAED
U
FELTUALUTLT
AF DEFD
AD
EUF
ELA
TA
FUULTLT DEFAD
UE
NGS
SETTINGS MENU (CONTINUED)
ttooccyycclleetthhrroouugghhtthheeLLaanngguuaaggee
You can also change the setting YbYoyouudcicrae
annaallssoocchhaannggeetthheesseettttiinngg TAP
to cycle through the Language ctly pressing on the
by toouucchhiinnggtthheeaarrrroow wssoonntthhee bbyyddiirreeccttllyypprreessssiinnggoonntthhee
by touching the arrows on the
settings of which there are 3 sseettttiinnggssooffwwhhiicchhtthheerreeaarree33 bLayntg uage LLaanngguuaaggee
levels. lleevveellss..
bottom of the screen OR bboottttoom moofftthheessccrreeeennOORR
DEFAULT
1 2
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
S DDEEFFAAU
ULLTT
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
11: 05 PM TSE
SETS ET
IN
TG
TINGS
TS
INGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M5 PM
SETTITNIN
SESTETTIN
GS
GSGS
11: 05 PM
111: 015: 0P5MPM
SE
SS
EE
TT
TT
TT
IIN
IN NGG
GS
SS
11: 05 PM
1111: 0: 055PP
MM SSE
SE
TTIN
ETTTTIIN
NG
GS
GS
S
1:10:5
111 05 P
1: 05 PPM
M
M SETTING
SSEETTTTIINNG
GS
S
S 11: 05 PM M
1111::0055PPM
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
ESS BBR
RIIG
GHHTTNNESSSS
DEE
FAULT DDEEFFAAUULLTT
DE FAULT
DEFAULT
DDEEFFAAUULLTT DDEFFAAUULLTT
DEEFAULT
DE
D
D
EFAUULLTT
EFFAAULT
DEF
DEF
NGS
HT BBNAACKKLLYIEIG
OC G
SHHTTYES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES
AVINGS PPO
OWWEER
RSSAAVVIIN
NGGSS
YES NOO YY
EESS YY
EESS NO YES YES NO YESS YESS NOO YES YES NO Y
NO YES NN
O YES YES NNOO YYEESS YYEESS N
NOO Y
YEES Y
YEES N
NO YYEESS YYEESS NO Y
SSEETTTTIIM
MEE
TAP
E LLAANNGGU
UAAGGEE
OK OK OK OK OK
TTAAPP
DDEEFFAAU
ULLTT TAP
TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
FOR RMMAATT OK OO
KKK gOeKKthe setting OK O
to cyclFeOth rou gh the Default O You can also chanO by directly pressinO gKon the Yes or OK
O
TAP
K O
settings of which there are by touching the arrows on the No TAP
Enter the Settings menu as shown on page Touch YES to return the options to the
TAP TAP
2levYeolus. can use the Hard Buttons YYoouuccaannuusseetthheeHHaarrddBBuuttttoonnss bottom of the screen OR You can also change the setting YYoouuccaannaallssoocchhaannggeetthheesseettttiinngg
to cycle through the Default ttooccyycclleetthhrroouugghhtthheeDDeeffaauulltt You can also change the setting YbYoyouudcicraaenn
ctaallylssoporccehh
sasan
in
ngg
geeottn
hhetehsseetYttteiinsngg
or TnA
bbyyddiirreeccttllyypprreessssiin ggPoonntthheeYYeessoorr
52. Touch DEFAULT; the Default setting factory settings. Select NO to keep the
by touching the arrows on the byoyttoouucchhiinnggtthheeaarrrroow wssoonntthhee
settings of which there are sseettttiinnggssooffwwhhiicchhtthheerreeaarree bN NNoo
2levels. 22lleevveellss.. bottom of the screen OR bboottttoom moofftthheessccrreeeennOORR
screen will appear. The Default setting will options as they are.
return the unit’s options to the factory When finished, touch the OK icon.
settings.
FORMAT
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
Format Format
FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
SS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENOE
FSRS
SMS
AT FOO
RRMAT FOORRM AT FORFM
FORFMATMAT FORFM ATMAT FORMOART
ATMAT
FOROMR
FORFM
AT
ATMAT FORFM
O
GS
T BABCNAKC
LKIG
LH
ING
THT YES
O O NO YES YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO NO YES
VINGS POPW
OEW
RESRAS
VA VG
IN INSGS
NO NO YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NOYES YES
NO NO Y NO NO YES
NONO NONO YESYES NONO YESYES YESYES NO ES YESYES NONO NONO YESYES NONO NO
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
TAP
LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
OK OK OK TAKP
O OK
TAPTAP
DEDFEAFUALU
TLT
TAP
You cF aOnFRuOsR
M tThAeTHO
eAM arKd Buttons Formatting will erO aK sOO
eKKall data on You can also changOeKO O
thKKe setting You can also changeO OK KthOeKsetting OK
O KOK OKO
to cycle through the Format the player by touching the arrows on the TAP by directly pressing on the Yes or TAP
Enter the Settings menu as shown on page Touch YES to erase all the data. Select NO
settYionugscaonf w TAP TAP
usheicthhethHearerdarBeuttons YFoouYrmocuaantctaiunnsgeuw stehiletl heHeraaH
rsdearBadullBtdtuoatn osn boFtYotoorFm
ttaos n um oattfnaitntahtgliesnw
orcam osgciclw
rlheeiaelrlnnaegsO
reaRsatehlleadlsal ed tnangonNoYYoou
ttaatio
2levtoelcsy. cle through the Format Yuocucaancnaanalslasoo lscochhacanhng agneegteh
thetehsesetstteitntintgigng You
Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
ttohetcoypccllayeyctelehrrtohuroguhgth ethFeorFm oram t at tbheythtpo elaupycleahryinegr the arrows on the bbyybtoyduitroceh
ucitcnlhygip rheetshsaiernrag roosnwotshno sT
etnhYeetsheor bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrseinsgA Pgnotn TA
52. Touch FORMAT; the Format setting to keep the options as they are.
ntg orw ino hethYe sYeosr or
settings of which there are setsteinttgins gosf o wfhwichhicth eth reearereare bottom of the screen OR bNoobttootm tom of o thf ethsecrsecern eeOnROR NoNo
2levels. 2le2vlelvse. ls.
screen will appear. The Format setting will When finished, touch the OK icon. The unit
erase all of the data on the unit, so be will restart. The memory card will also be
careful
Modewhen
ABAO
l : MMX 00891using. formatted if inserted.
11: 05 PM BU OTUT
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTS
INEGSINGS 11: 051PM
SETTIN T
GTS 11: 05 1
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM
GS Mem or ex PMP Touch
M oBC
dAeKClL:KIMLM XH0T0891
56
BA G IG
H T MoM
doed
l :eM
l :M
MXM0X00
8098
191
INGS Capaci t y: 2000 MB
M
POePW
mOE oW rReES
xRAPS
VM
A P
VG
IN IToGuSch
NS MeM
meomr eoxr ePxMPPMTPou
To uch
ch
Fr ee Space: 879 MB
C
SapTa
ES ETcTIiM
tTyIE
:M2E
000 MB CaC
pap
ciat cyi:t 2
y:02
000M
0BMB
SETTINGS MENU (CONTINUED)
ABOUT
NOTES:
• You can touch the Return icon to return to the previous menu.
• When adjusting the settings, you can also use the Left/Up, Right/Down and Center
buttons instead of the m, l and ® icons respectively to navigate and select the items
as shown in the Setting section.
57
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
If you experience a problem with this unit, check the chart below before calling for service.
58
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (CONTINUED)
59
FORMATTING THE PLAYER
WARNING! Do not format this player unless it stops working and you are
instructed to do so by technical support personnel. Formatting will erase the
contents of the internal or external memory.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the player and the computer.
2. Open Windows Media Player 11.
3. Click on the SYNC menu at the top right of the application.
4. From this menu, click on Internal Storage to format the internal memory or
External Storage to format the external memory card, if inserted and then
select Format.
5. Click OK to format the selected Storage item and erase the contents.
CLEANING:
Use the enclosed cloth to clean the delicate touch screen surface.
60
RESETTING THE UNIT
If the unit acts erratically, reset the unit by inserting a thin object (such as a paper
clip) into the recessed Reset button. See page 6 for the Reset button's location.
After resetting, please wait 30 seconds before turning on the unit again.
NOTE: After the Reset button is pressed, it may take several minutes for the unit
to come on again.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, please back-up all of your
media files on your computer. After upgrading, format the unit to complete the
upgrade procedure.
61
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio Frequency Range 20Hz–20KHz
Headphones Output 8.5mW, 16 ohm (Max Vol)
S/N Ratio 90dB (MP3) 54dB (Tuner)
62
FOR FIRMWARE UPGRADE, PLEASE VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT
WWW.MEMOREX.COM
TO CHECK IF THERE IS NEW FIRMWARE AVAILABLE.
63
ÍNDICE
Precauciones..................................................2 Álbum .......................................................33
Declaración de la FCC ...................................3 • Alternar entre diferentes portadas...........34
Pautas EIA......................................................4 Funcionamiento-Modo de Reproducción de
Ubicación de los Controles ............................6 Fotos............................................................35
Cargar las Pilas. .............................................7 • Pantalla de fotografías.............................35
Instalación del Software ..............................8 • Visualizar Fotografías ..............................35
• Instalación de Windows Media Player 11..9 • Visualizar diapositivas .............................37
• Instalación de MediaCoder ......................11 Funcionamiento-Modo de Reproducción de
• Instalación de AudibleManager ...............13 Videos..........................................................39
Descargar y Transferir Archivos ...................15 • Pantalla de Videos...................................39
Utilizar el MediaCoder ..................................22 • Visualizar videos......................................39
Quitar el Hardware con Seguridad...............23 • Saltar hacia Adelante/Atrás .....................41
Funcionamiento General ...........................24 • Búscar Videos a alta velocidad ...............41
• Entrada para Auriculares ........................24 Funcionamiento– Modo radio FM .............42
• Volumen y Silencio ..................................24 • Pantalla de Radio FM..............................42
• Función Bloqueo......................................24 • Escuchar la radio FM ..............................42
• Encendido/ Apagado (On/Off) .................25 • Búsqueda automática..............................43
• Botón de Menú (Menu)............................25 • Agregar y seleccionar memorias.............44
• Introducir/Quitar la Tarjeta Funcionamiento-Modo Grabador de Voz .45
de Memoria Externa (Micro SD)..............25 • Pantalla de Voz........................................45
Navegar Por el Menú Principal y Las • Grabar/Escuchar grabaciones de voz .....45
Listas ............................................................26 • Borrar una grabación...............................48
Menú principal (Main Menu)......................28 Funcionamiento-Modo Libro de Audio ....49
Funcionamiento-Modo de Reproducción • Pantalla de libro de audio........................49
de Música ....................................................29 • Ver un libro de audio ...............................49
• Pantalla de reproducción de música .......29 • Alternar entre las portadas del libro de
• Escuchar MP3s/WMAs............................29 audio.............................................................50
• Saltar hacia Adelante/Atrás .....................31 Menú de Configuración ............................52
• Búscar Música a Alta Velocidad ..............31 Guía de Resolución de Problemas ..............58
• Ecualizador (EQ) .....................................32 Formatear el Reproductor ............................60
• Modos de Reproducción..........................33 Reiniciar de la unidad...................................61
• Elegir o cambiar las portadas del Especificaciones...........................................62
1
PRECAUCIONES
DERECHO DE AUTOR:
• La distribución de copias de pistas en formato MP3, WMA, WMA con archivos DRM y/o WAV sin
premiso es una violación de las leyes internacionales de los derechos de autor.
• Este producto se encuentra protegido por derechos de propiedad intelectual de Microsoft. La
utilización o distribución de dicha tecnología fuera del ámbito de este producto y sin la licencia
otorgada por Microsoft, se encuentra prohibida.
SEGURIDAD:
• La vibración experimentada al caminar o hacer ejercicio no afectará al reproductor. Sin embargo,
dejar caer el reproductor o dejar caer un objeto pesado sobre el reproductor puede ocasionar
daños o distorsión en el sonido.
• No permita que caiga líquido sobre el reproductor o en su interior.
• No deje el reproductor en un lugar cercano a una fuente de calor; ni en lugar donde caiga la luz
directa del sol, polvo excesivo, arena, humedad, lluvia o impacto mecánico; ni en una superficie
desnivelada; ni tampoco en un auto con las ventanas cerradas durante períodos de calor
excesivo.
SEGURIDAD EN EL CAMINO:
• No utilice audífonos mientras conduce, anda en bicicleta o mientras opera un vehículo
motorizado. Eso puede crear un peligro de tránsito y es ilegal en algunos lugares. Es
potencialmente peligroso tener los audífonos a alto volumen mientras camina, especialmente en
cruces peatonales. Sea extremadamente precavido o suspenda el uso en situaciones
potencialmente peligrosas.
NOTIFICACIÓN DE LA FCC:
• Este equipo puede generar o bien usar energía de radiofrecuencia. Los cambios o
modificaciones hechos a este equipo pueden causar interferencias dañinas, a menos que las
modificaciones estén expresamente aprobadas en el manual de instrucciones. El usuario puede
perder el derecho a operar este equipo si se efectúa un cambio o modificación no autorizado.
2
DECLARACIÓN DE LA FCC
Este aparato cumple con el Apartado 15 de las normas de la FCC. El funcionamiento está
sujeto a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) Este aparato no debe causar interferencia
dañina y (2) este aparato debe aceptar cualquier interferencia que reciba, incluso aquella
interferencia que pueda causar una operación indeseada.
NOTA: Este equipo fue probado y se encontró que cumple con las limitantes para
aparatos digitales de Clase B, de conformidad con el Apartado 15 de las Normas de la
FCC. Dichas limitantes fueron diseñadas con la intención de brindar una protección
razonable contra la interferencia dañina en una instalación residencial. Este equipo
genera, usa y puede irradiar energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y usa conforme
a las instrucciones, puede generar interferencia dañina con las radiocomunicaciones.
Sin embargo, no hay garantía de que no habrá interferencia en una instalación particular.
Si este equipo llegara a causar interferencia dañina con la recepción de radio o televisión,
lo cual se puede determinar encendiendo y apagando el equipo, le pedimos que intente
corregir la interferencia con las siguientes medidas:
3
Estimado Cliente:
En el momento en que seleccionó un equipo de tan alta tecnología como el que usted
acaba de comprar, su entretenimiento musical recién comenzó. Ahora es tiempo de
pensar en cómo puede optimizar el entretenimiento que su equipo le ofrece. Este
fabricante y la Asociación de Industrias Electrónicas del Grupo de Consumidores
Electrónicos desean que usted obtenga el mejor resultado de su equipo, usándolo a un
nivel seguro como es escuchar un sonido claro y sonoro, sin distorsión y, sobre todo,
sin que afecte su sentido auditivo. El sonido es engañoso, ya que con el tiempo su nivel
de audición puede adaptarse a escuchar sólo en volumen alto, resultando en un serio
daño a su sentido auditivo. Protéjase contra este daño innecesario ajustando el
volumen de su equipo a un nivel bajo antes de acostumbrarse a escuchar siempre la
música a un volumen alto.
Eso le tomará tan solo un minuto, y le ayudará a prevenir la pérdida del oído en el
futuro.
4
Nivel de decibeles Ejemplo
30 Una biblioteca, susurros.
40 Sala, refrigerador, dormitorio lejos del tráfico.
50 Semáforo, conversación normal, oficina tranquila.
60 Aire acondicionado a 20 pies, máquina de coser
70 Aspiradora, secadora de pelo, restaurante bullicioso.
80 Tráfico en la calle, triturador de basura, alarma de reloj a 60 cm.
We
Want You
LISTENING
For A Lifetime
C IND
NI U
R O
S
ELECT
TR
EIA
IES
EST. 1924
A
N
S
S O
O C I A TI
5
UBICACIÓN DE LOS CONTROLES
FRENTE 1. Pantalla Táctil
2. Botones para subir/bajar el volumen
(Volume Up/Down)
3. Botón Izquierdo de Salto/ Búsqueda
hacia arriba (Left/Skip/Search)
4. Micrófono (Lateral de la unidad)
5. Selector de
1 Encendido/Apagado/Bloqueo
(Power/Lock)
6. Botón de menú (Menu)
7. Botón Central/Reproducir/Pausar
(Center/Play/Pause)
8. Botón Derecho de Salto/ Búsqueda
5 hacia abajo (Right/Skip/Search)
9. Botón de Reinicio (Reset) (Orificio en
la parte lateral de la unidad)
10. Entrada para Auriculares
6 (AURICULARES PIEZA NO.
2
7 CTEAREDFD00873B-0-00*)
11. Ranura para Tarjeta de Memoria
SD/Micro
3 8
4 9 12. Ranura USB (CABLE USB - PIEZA
NO.
CTPCLUSBZY00500-0-00 (Blanco)*
PARTE INFERIOR CTPCLUSBZY00400-0-00 (Negro)*)
13. Tapa de la Ranura de Tarjeta de
Memoria/USB
6
CARGAR LAS PILAS
Esta unidad posee una pila recargable incorporada de Polímeros de Litio. Pila
Cuando las barras del indicador de la pila (en la pantalla) estén bajas Completo
(Figura 1), y antes de usar la unidad por primera vez, recargue la pila del
Pila
baja
siguiente modo:
Ilustración 1
NOTAS:
• Para desconectar la unidad de la computadora, asegúrese de leer las instrucciones de
“Quitar el Hardware con Seguridad” en la página 23.
• Debe cargar esta unidad durante tres horas antes de usarla por primera vez.
• Las pilas sin carga tardarán aprox. 4 horas en cargarse por completo. Cuando la carga
esté completa, el tiempo de reproducción de la unidad será de aprox. 50 horas en el
modo de Reproducción de Música y en el modo de Video de 4 horas. (El tiempo real
de reproducción puede variar.)
• Para transferir información, utilice el cable USB para conectar la unidad a la
computadora.
• Cuando la pila esté agotada y se conecte a la computadora para su carga, pueden
pasar unos minutos hasta que aparezca la pantalla “CONECTADO” (CONNECTING).
7
INSTALACIÓN DEL SOFTWARE
CD de instalación del software (PIEZA N.º CTPCDMEMO085001-0-00*)
Información general
Esta unidad es compatible con Microsoft Windows XP (Edición Hogar o Profesional con
Service Pack 2 o superior) o Vista. MediaCoder es compatible con Microsoft Windows
XP y Vista.
8
INSTALACIÓN DEL WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
Una vez que haya instalado Windows Media Player 11, podrá transferir archivos MP3,
WMA, WMA con DRM 10 y fotografías a su reproductor utilizando la función “Sync”.
NOTA: Esta unidad no es compatible con WMP 10.
9
INSTALACIÓN DEL WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
4. Lea el Contrato de Licencia, luego haga clic en
“Acepto”.
5. La instalación comenzará.
10
INSTALACIÓN DE MEDIACODER
Procedimiento para instalar MediaCoder
11
INSTALACIÓN DE MEDIACODER
4. Aparecerá la pantalla “Carpeta de instalación”
(Installation Folder). Se recomienda dejar la
carpeta como está. Luego haga clic en
“Instalar” (Install); el programa se instalará.
12
INSTALACIÓN DE AUDIBLEMANAGER
AudibleManager es un programa que le permite descargar y escuchar libros de
audio de Audible. Utilice AudibleManager para transferir programas de audiobook
a su TouchMP de AudibleReady®.
3. En la ventana de Configuración de
AudibleManager, seleccione su dispositivo
(Memorex TouchMP) de la lista desplegable,
y haga clic en OK.
13
INSTALACIÓN DE AUDIBLEMANAGER (CONTINUACIÓN)
4. Siga las instrucciones en pantalla para la instalación.
NOTA:
Una cuenta de conexión para AudibleManager tiene un límite de tres dispositivos
y cuatro escritorios. Si intenta sobrepasar este límite, recibirá un mensaje de error
y no podrá reproducir el archivo del libro de audio.
14
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS
FORMATOS COMPATIBLES DE ARCHIVOS MULTIMEDIA
Formatos de Audio: Archivos MP3, WMA con DRM 10 con una tasa de transferencia de 48-
192 kbps
Formatos de Video: AVI MPEG4: Perfil simple (resolución de 320x240, 20-24 fps, 385kbps);
WMV: VC-1 Perfil simple (resolución de 320x240, 20-24fps, 385kbps máx.)
Formatos de Fotografía: Baseline JPEGs
TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS
Podrá descargar archivos digitales de música desde Internet o
utilizar un software de codificación para convertir la música de los
CD de audio al formato MP3 o WMA. Una vez que los archivos
están almacenados en la computadora, puede copiarlos
fácilmente en el reproductor.
Si ya ha instalado WMP (Windows Media Player) 11, podrá
transferir archivos de música (MP3, WMA y/o WMA con DRM
10), fotos y videos al reproductor a través de la función “Sync” del
WMP 11. Conecte su reproductor al puerto USB de su
computadora como se explica a la derecha y see page 20 for details.
15
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
16
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
5. Su navegador abrirá audible.com. Cree una cuenta
y compre un libro o conéctese en su cuenta para
visualizar “Mi Biblioteca” (My Library).
17
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
CONVERSIÓN DE UN CD DE AUDIO EN FORMATO MP3 O WMA.
Para Windows XP, también puede utilizar Windows Media Player 11 previamente instalado para
convertir música de un CD de audio a formato MP3 o WMA como se describe a continuación:
1. Abra el Navegador (Browser) de Windows Media Player 11, luego haga clic en el icono “Grabar”
(“Rip”) que aparece en la parte superior de la barra de herramientas. Coloque un CD de música en
la unidad de CD-Rom de su computadora.
2. Verifique que está conectado a Internet y luego inicie Windows Media Player (WMP). Cuando se
conecta a Internet, WMP intenta recuperar información de multimedia como el nombre del álbum y
del artista de las pistas que se van a grabar desde una base de datos Windows Media mantenida
por Microsoft. WMP luego agrega la información a los archivos durante la grabación. Si la
información de multimedia es incorrecta, podrá agregar o editar la misma después de grabar. Para
obtener información acerca de cómo agregar o editar información de multimedia, consulte la Ayuda
de Windows Media Player en la página Web de WMP.
18
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
5. Introduzca un CD de audio en una unidad de CD, y luego haga
clic en la etiqueta Grabar (Rip), como se muestra a
continuación. WMP comienza a grabar el CD automáticamente
de manera predeterminada, cuando se encuentra en la etiqueta
Grabar (Rip) o cuando pasa a esta etiqueta por primera vez
después de haber introducido el CD. También puede elegir que
comience a grabar inmediatamente después de introducir el
CD, o puede desactivar el grabado automático desde la
etiqueta Grabar Música (Rip Music) del cuadro de diálogo
Opciones (Options). Tenga en cuenta que todas las canciones
quedarán seleccionadas para grabarse si
todavía no se grabaron.
8. Cuando finalice la carga de los archivos en la unidad, siga las instrucciones de “Cómo quitar el
hardware con seguridad” como se explica en la página 23.
NOTA: Para obtener más información, consulte la página Web de ayuda de Microsoft para WMP11:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
19
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
TRANSFERENCIA DE ARCHIVOS MP3/WMA/VIDEO/FOTOS Y ARCHIVOS WMA CON
DRM 10 UTILIZANDO WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
Para transferir archivos MP3/WMA/FOTOS/VIDEOS/WMA con DRM 10 al reproductor
utilizando el WMP (Windows Media Player) 11 instalado anteriormente, siga las siguientes
instrucciones. Antes de comenzar, conecte la unidad a la computadora como se indicó
previamente.
1. Abra “Windows Media Player 11”; WMP sincronizará automáticamente toda su biblioteca.
También puede elegir lo que desea que se sincronice automáticamente si selecciona la
lista de reproducción que desea sincronizar. Con esta opción, el Reproductor sincroniza
sus archivos multimedia digitales en el dispositivo para reflejar su biblioteca cuando la
conecta a su computadora o cuando cambia la configuración de sincronización.
2. También puede arrastrar y colocar los archivos en sus carpetas respectivas. Por ejemplo,
arrastrar y colocar los archivos de fotos (jpg) en la carpeta Imágenes (Pictures), etc.
3. Cuando haya terminado de transferir todos los archivos deseados a su unidad, siga el
procedimiento de “Cómo quitar el hardware con seguridad” (Safely Remove Hardware) en
la página 23.
NOTAS:
• Los archivos WMA con DRM 10 no se reproducirán si los transfiere a la tarjeta de memoria
micro SD. Deberá transferir los archivos WMA con DRM 10 a la memoria interna del
reproductor para poder reproducirlos.
• Si la tarjeta externa se encuentra colocada, el indicador de la tarjeta de memoria
aparecerá en la parte superior de la pantalla.
• Para obtener más información, consulte la página Web de ayuda de Microsoft para
WMP11: http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
20
DESCARGAR Y TRANSFERIR ARCHIVOS (CONTINUACIÓN)
CREAR UNA LISTA DE REPRODUCCIÓN UTILIZANDO WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER 11
Siga las siguientes instrucciones para crear una lista de reproducción para la opción Lista de
reproducción (Playlist) del menú , utilizando WMP (Windows Media Player) 11:
NOTAS:
• Para obtener más información, consulte la página Web de ayuda de Microsoft para WMP11:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
21
UTILIZAR DEL MEDIACODER
Puede usar el MediaCoder previamente instalado para convertir archivos MPG, MPG4,
ASF, AVI y WMV en archivos AVI compatibles con el reproductor.
6. Si lo desea, ahora podrá convertir más archivos de acuerdo con los procedimientos
anteriores.
NOTAS: Consulte la página 15 para obtener más información sobre cómo transferir
archivos a la unidad.
22
QUITAR EL HARDWARE CON SEGURIDAD
CÓMO QUITAR SU REPRODUCTOR CON SEGURIDAD DE LA COMPUTADORA
NOTA: Para evitar daños a su reproductor o pérdida de datos, respete siempre el
procedimiento detallado a continuación antes de desconectar su reproductor del puerto
USB de su computadora.
NOTAS:
• Si no aparece el icono “Quitar Hardware con seguridad”
(Safely Remove Hardware) en la barra de tareas, haga doble clic en Mi PC. Haga clic
con el botón derecho del mouse en “Memorex TouchMP” y con el botón izquierdo en
“Expulsar” (Eject). Entonces será seguro quitar el reproductor de la computadora.
• Si está utilizando Windows XP y el software Windows Media Player 11 ya se encuentra
instalado en su computadora, no necesitará seguir las instrucciones anteriores de “Quitar
el Hardware con Seguridad”.
23
FUNCIONAMIENTO GENERAL
ENTRADA PARA AURICULARES VOLUMEN Y SILENCIO
1 1 1
2
Conecte los auriculares en la Entrada para Para cambiar el volumen, oprima el botón para subir
Auriculares ubicada en la parte inferior de o bajar el volumen (Volume Up 1/ Down 2). Cuando
cambia el volumen, el indicador se superpondrá en la
la unidad. parte inferior de la pantalla actual y desaparecerá de
la pantalla cinco segundos después si no se presiona
ninguno de los botones de volumen.
Cuando aparezca el indicador emergente de volumen,
puede tocar el indicador para silenciar el sonido.
Oprima nuevamente el indicador o uno de los botones
de volumen para restablecer el sonido.
FUNCIÓN BLOQUEO
24
FUNCIONAMIENTO GENERAL (CONTINUACIÓN)
ENCENDIDO/APAGADO
USB CONNECTION SCREENS (ON/OFF) Botón de MENÚ
1 1
USB and DASHBOARD
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
CONNECTING TRANSFERRING
OK TO
DO NOT DO NOT
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
RADIO VIDEO
Para encender
the comlaputerunidad,
, the screen will deslice
transel
ferredinterruptor de En cualquierscremomento, oprima Menú para
volver al menú animPrincipal.
When the unit is connected to When the unit is not transferring Once the unit is disconnected the
arriba y libérelo; la unidad ingresará en el menú NOTA: Vea cómo navegar por los menús en la
show “Connecting” as it “ Transferring” “Ok to Disconnect” ation and cycle until complete. to the Main Menu and remain ON.
establishes a connection.
1
This indicates the battery status.
This indicates that th
MUSIC PHOTO
100% - 76% hold status. It will di
25
FUNCIONAMIENTO GENERAL (CONTINUACIÓN)
m
1 2
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU SELECTION
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSICPHOTO PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO
3
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK
1 SETTINGS VOICE
2
AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOICE
AUDIOBOOK AUDIO
SETBTO
INOG
KS SETTINGS
Si no se encuentra en el menú
menu itemPrincipal, Seleccione la opciónicomediante la pantalla
when utáctil
sing the hcon
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the The cycle for the menu items
oprima el botón Menú para volver al sólo presionarla. También puede utilizar los
down on the icon. icon. You can also change the hard buttons to move aroundn ard button
with hard buttons. the Main Menu
3
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
TAP Ar t i st
IST NAVIGATION
Al bum
Genr e
Izquierda/Hacia
2. i t em
abajo
P
TA
3. i t em 10. i t em Ta3p
. i tt e
hm 3. i t em 72. i t em
amediante
lways take you to the Mel botón Derecha/Hacia abajo
e Now Playing icon at the
bottom of the screen and it will
1
4. i t em 11. i t em 4. i t em 4. i t em 73. i t em Hold
When in the list screen use the Every page change brings the To move rapidly through pages This will eventually take you to the
When in the list screen use the
scrolling buttons on right side highlight bar up to the top. hold down the bottom scrolling final page with the highlight bar
scrolling buttons on right side
to move the page Up button over the top of item of the last pag
to move the page down
4 5
the end
2. No One El se 2. No One El se
ROCK SHUFFLE
3. The Wor l d Has Tur 3. The Wor l d Has Tur
7. Say It Ai n’ t So 7. Say It Ai n’ t So
largo y desea ver todo el nombre, presione Para volver a la página anterior, oprima el
it will take you to the next screen.
select a list item is to directly
tap on the item
27
MENÚ PRINCIPAL (MAIN MENU)
MENÚ PRINCIPAL (MAIN MENU): Oprima el botón Menú para acceder al menú Principal.
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MU S I C P H OT O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
R ADI O VI DE O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MA I N ME N U N 1O1:W
0 5 PP
M L AY I N G
R ADI O VI DE O
11: 05 P M
11: 05 P M R ADI O VI DE O
N OW P L AYpágina
I N G 52.
VI DE O
42.
O VOI C EVI DE O AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
N OW P L AY I N G N OW P L AY I N G
28
AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
R ADI O VI DE O
AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
N OW P L AY I N G
N OW P L AY I N G
6. Sur f Wa
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DEPLAREPRODUCCIÓN DE
List ItMÚSICA
List Item 6
EPEAT ALL VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
PANTALLA DE REPRODUCCIÓN
NowDE MÚSICA
Now Playing
Ful
Playing
No
Seleccione Pantalla
ToCompleta o Hacia atrásTo(Un
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
ScreeEstándar paso)
4 of 14
ggle Full Back ggle Full
REPEAT 1 n Album Art 00: 27 / 03: 25 (one Step) Screen Album Art
Configuración del
Modo
Playback de
ROCK SHUFFLE
EEcualizador
Q Setting (EQ)
Reproducción
(Playback Mode)
Mode
CCambiar
hange Pla
hoPortada
del Álbum
to
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
SHUFFLE
PrPista
evious Trprevia Avance
Forward andy Previous Track
4. Buddy Hol l y
ESCUCHAR MP3s/WMAs
Play/Pause P
Button B
Esta unidad es compatible con los siguientes formatos de audio: MP3, MPEG 1/2/2.5 Capa 3 con una tasa de
IC1
transferencia de 32-320 kbps y archivos WMA o WMA con DRM 10 con una tasa de transferencia de 48-192 kbps.
2
MAIN MENU
Now Pl ayi ng
Al l Songs
MUSIC PHOTO
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Ar t i st
TAP
Al bum
TAP VIDEO
RADIO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO
Genr e
29 G
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE MÚSICA (CONTINUACIÓN)
3
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
MUSIC
Music Navigation THE MUSIC LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
Todas las canciones: Toque la pantalla y todas las canciones aparecerán en la próxima lista.
menu. selection.
30
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE MÚSICA (CONTINUACIÓN)
1 2
Durante la reproducción, toque el icono m (u oprima el botón Durante la reproducción, toque el icono l (u
Izquierdo/Hacia arriba (Left/Up)) para mover el reproductor oprima el botón Derecho/Hacia abajo
hacia atrás al inicio del archivo que se encuentra
(Right/Down)) para avanzar el reproductor hacia
reproduciendo. Toque/oprima varias veces para volver el
reproductor hacia atrás a los números de archivos más bajos. el inicio del próximo archivo. Toque/oprima varias
NOTA: Si la música no comienza a reproducirse dentro de los veces para avanzar el reproductor hacia los
5 segundos, oprima el botón Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up) números de archivos más altos.
nuevamente para volver al archivo anterior.
1 2
31
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE MÚSICA (CONTINUACIÓN)
NOTAS:
•Consulte las páginas 15-21 para saber como cargar archivos MP3/WMA a la unidad.
• Mientras busca música, podrá oprimir el icono Volver (Return) para regresar al menú
anterior.
• Si desea pausar la reproducción de música, toque el icono p u oprima el botón Centro
(Center). Toque el icono ® u oprima el botón Centro (Center) para reanudar la
reproducción.
• Configure el modo de reproducción en Normal, Repetir una (Repeat One), Repetir todas
(Repeat All) u Orden aleatorio (Shuffle) como se muestra en la página siguiente.
• Asimismo, puede usar los botones Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up), Derecha/Abajo (Right/Down)
y Centro (Center) en lugar de los iconos m, l y ® respectivamente para navegar y
seleccionar los elementos, tal como se muestra en las dos páginas anteriores.
• Ajuste el nivel de volumen como se explica en la página 24.
ECUALIZADOR (EQ)
32
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE MÚSICA (CONTINUACIÓN)
MODOS DE REPRODUCCIÓN
1
MUSIC
TOGGLE ALBUM ART
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
Repetir todas
4. Buddy Hol l y
seleccionada.
Repetir todas: repite continuamente todas las
return to the normal now canciones
bar and seleccionadas.
art and the Standard Screen Ordenplayaleatorio
The upper left button is used Push the button again to After 2 sec. the Play function Tap the screen to bring the
1 2
CHANGE ALBUM ART
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
SELECT ALBUM ART 11: 05 PM SELECT ALBUM ART 11: 05 PM
4 of 14
4 of 14
Def aul t Dodger gam e 01.j pg
00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
Bear br i ck phot os 02
TAP
Reproducción de música, toque el icono seleccionar un ícono predefinido o Mis fotos (My
by tapping on the album art box. by tapping on the album art box. default - which shows album art or When a phot
hard buttons to navigate the list
My Photo - which allows you to art changes
33
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO
een to bring the You can still use tDE
he hard bREPRODUCCIÓN
uttons DE MÚSICA (CONTINUACIÓN)
1
Now Playing Screen in the General Play Functions
2. j pg TAP
k phot os 02
TAP
list you can use the When a photo is chosen, the album
to navigate the list art changes to the photo
34
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear b
/Pause
eshow
on
Next
Picture
Back
PreFotografía siguiente
(one Step)
anterior fotografía
vious Picture Next Picture
Botón Comenzar/Pausar la
presentación
Play/Pde
audiapositivas
(Play/Pause Slideshow)
se Slideshow
OT1 O 2
MAIN MENU
PHOTO
MAIN MENU SELECTION PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MHAOIT
P NOMENU 111: 0
15: 0P5MPM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSICMUSIC PHOTOPHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Kubr i ck phot os 03
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 01
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIORADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 02
35
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 23
44of 14 24 / 234
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
Al l Songs
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE FOTOGRAFÍAS (CONTINUACIÓN)
3a 3b
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS. PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 1O
PH 1:T0O5 PM
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01 VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01
aparecerá sentonces
creen or the the hard buttonsla fotografía fotos en
the scrb on ll abiluvttieownsptaogceh. ang
screeminiatura.
n or the the hard buttoDesplácese por la lista y
You can navigate using the touch You can navigate using the touch
seleccionada. Los iconos desaparecerán toque una fotografía para verla; aparecerá
ns
to move up and down to move up and down
tras
TO PLAun
Y FUNpar
CTIONde segundos. Simplemente PHOTO PLAY FentoncesUNCTIONS la fotografía elegida. Para ver los
toque la pantalla para verlos otra vez. iconos otra vez toque la pantalla.
PHO S
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO
4 5
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Si ck Bi k
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 234 24 / 234
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 2
Kur br i ck phot os 02
MUSIC PHOTO
Mientras visualiza
screen. Hila
t the bfoto
ack buttoelegida,
List mentoque
u after the imael
The thumbnail screen functions Once you select a photo, it will You can use the back button or
Push the Thumbnail icon on In thumnail mode use the same
en miniatura, oprima el icono Lista (List) icono Volver (Return) para regresar a la
in the same way that the list take you to the photo viewing the Photo View will go to the
the right side and the list tap method to make your
screen navigation works. Tap on n to ge in
will go to Thumnail Mode selection
vista en miniatura.
the scroll buttons to change page
You can navigate using the touch
creen or the the hard buttons
to move up and down
36
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE FOTOGRAFÍAS (CONTINUACIÓN)
VISUALIZAR DIAPOSITIVAS
1 2
MAIN MENU SELECTION
MENU
MAINPHOTO * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NTA HVEIG
PAHTOINGLIST MENUS.
TO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
OTO NAVIGATION THE MPAH
IN O
METO LIST ME1N1:0U5 PSM.
NU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU PHOTO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
Kur br i ck pPhHo
OTtOos 02
24 / 234
Kur br i ckMUpSIhC ot os 02PHOTO
Kur br i ck phoHtoolsdMU0S2
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
IC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
3 4
to move up and down
TAP Ar t i st
Al bum
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
Genr e
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
Pl ayl i st VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 4. Buddy Hol l y
37
You can navigate using the touch
5 6
LAY FUNCTIONS
11: 05 P
1M1: 05 PM PHOP
TH
OOTO 11: 0151P: 0M5 PM PHP
OHTOTO 11:1015: 0P5MPM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
bB
ueda
dry.bj pugddy.j pg Bear S
biucdkdByi.kj peg.j pg Bea
Breb
arudbduyd.d
j pyg.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
/ 2234 / 234 24 /25 23/4 234 24 2/4 2/34234 25 / 234 24 / 234
visualiza una foto, toque el icono m o el l visualiza una foto, toque el icono Paisaje
ge the . until the screen is tapped
The image will change every bac1k stoect.huenptirletvhieouscsriemeangies .tapped
epxat uosreptrheevisohuosw. age back to the previous image.
im photo to the next or previous image
again. n.
3 seconds in slideshow
NOTAS:
• Consulte las páginas 15 a 21 para saber cómo cargar archivos de fotos a la unidad.
• Mientras busca fotografías, podrá tocar el icono Volver (Return) para regresar al menú
anterior.
• Puede escuchar música, la radio o un libro de audio mientras mira las fotografías.
Simplemente comience la reproducción de la música, la radio o el libro de audio y
luego ingrese al modo de fotografías (Photo).
• Asimismo, puede usar los botones Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up), Derecha/Abajo
(Right/Down) y Centro (Center) en lugar de los iconos m, l y ® respectivamente para
navegar y seleccionar los elementos, tal como se muestra en la sección Fotografías.
38
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE VIDEO
Scroll down
G List Item 7 Epi sode 18 (hold to make
scrolling faster)
PANTALLA DE VIDEO
Now Playing
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Botón
Comenzar/
SPausar
lideshola
Play/Pause
presentación
w
Rewind(hold) Avance
Rápido
Fast Forward
(hold)
(Bloqueo) (one Step)
Back
1 2
VIDEO
MAIN MENU
39
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r e
PLAY FUNCTION POP UP Ref er ence. GO
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE PVIDEO
LAY FUNCT(CONTINUACIÓN)
ION POP UP * NOTE
3 4
Ref er e
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
VIDEO NAVIGATION THE VIDEO LIST MENUS.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
Desplácese por la lista y toque el nombre del Si desea pausar la reproducción delNovideo,
While the pop up is up, press the You can use the back button or
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or the Now Playing will go to the
back button to return to the list
seleccionado. Para ver los iconos, simplemente botón Centro (Center) para reanudar la
deberá tocar la pantalla. Refer ence. reproducción.
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on
PLAY FUNCTION POP UP
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
NOTAS:
• Los videos se reproducirán únicamente en el formato de paisaje.
• Consulte las páginas 15 y -21 para saber cómo cargar archivos de video Hold a la unidad.
• Mientras busca videos, podrá tocar el icono Volver (Return) para regresar al menú
Hold
TAP TAP TAP
2sec 2sec
The playanterior.
this•buttAsimismo, puede
playback is stopusar los Vidbotones Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up), fast forward the traDerecha/Abajo
button controls the Now the screen will display The forward button skips The back button skip back plays I f yo u ho l d th e fo r wa rd If you hold the Reverse
playback of the video. Press the pause icon. The video the video ahead to the next the previous video. button down, it will button down, it will
40
FUNCIONAMIENTO-MODO DE REPRODUCCIÓN DE VIDEO (CONTINUACIÓN)
1 2
r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on PLAY FUNCTION POP UP Ref er ence.
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
Ent our age 14 TAP Ent our age 14 Hold Hold TAP TAP
TAP TAP 2sec 2sec
Ent our age 15 Ent our age 15
1
TAP
* NSOETTTIE!S! : Pl ease r ef er t o
EnNto
owur Pl aey1
ag i n7g Musi c Scr een f or but t on Ent our age 17
P VOICE AUDIOBOOK NG
Ref er ence.
NOW PLAYING
While the pop up is up, press the You can use the back button or
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or
buttvelocidad mientras
button downmantenga presionado el
botón/ elemento.RewCuando libera el icono/botón, se
Now the screen will display The forward button skips The back button skip back plays I f yo u h o l d t h e fo r wa rd If you hold the Reverse
VIDEO
the paEunt osuer ageic/ soeasnon.3 Tepihsodee 1v7 1i1d:05ePo
M VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
the video ahead to the next the previous video. VIDEO
on down, it will
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
, it will VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
1 2
Hold Hold
TAP TAP TAP 2sec 2sec
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO DE Go to Music
Now Playing RADIO
NOW PLAYFM
ING (CONTINUACIÓN)
automática paso)
Auto Scan SCAN Back
(one Step)
102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
6 memorias de
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
estaciones
6 Preset Stations P1 P2 P3
Búsqueda hacia
P4 P5 P6
Búsqueda hacia
atrás adelante
Scan Backward Scan Forward
Silenciar y restablecer el
Scan Backward Scan Forward
volumen
to Next (Hold) to Next (Hold)
Mute Button
ESCUCHAR LA RADIO FM
O1 2 RADIO
MAIN MENU
SCAN
MUSIC
Hold
PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
MUSIC
MUSIC
PHOTO
PHOTO 102.7
MUSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz PHOTO
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
P1 P2 P3
RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
P4 P5 P6
NOW PLAYING
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING
TUNING GO
42
RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
SCAN 4 of 14 SCAN
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
3 4110022.6.6
NUAL TUNING MMAANNUUAALLTTUUNNIN
INGG
AR ADIO 11: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO :1015: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11:1015: 0P5MPM
M MAIN MENU
OAIN MENU 11: 051P:1015: 0P5MPM
1M RD
RA IDOIO 111:10:505PM RADIO IO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM11: 05 PM RADIORADIO 11: 05 1P1M IO
FM1
M F F F FM1
M1
1 F F
SAS
CNAC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCAN SCS
AC
NAN
SC SCAN SCAN SCANSCAN
102.7
MUM
SUICSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz
PHP
OHTO
OTO
111000222..67
KiK
.7
ssi sF
sM FM
mm
m hz
hzhz 10211.06022.6
.6 m hz m hmzhz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz m hmzhz 1011200.272.7
.7 Ki ss FM
Ki ssKFi sMs FM
m hz
m hz m hz 110022.7
.7
KiKssi sF
sM FM
m hmzhz
TA
TAPP RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
P4 P5 P6 P4 P4P5 P5 P5P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
P4 P5 P6 P4P4 P5P5 P6P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P6
VOV
ICOEICE AUA
DU DBIO
IO OB
OOKOK SES
TE
TITNTG
IN
SGS SCAN SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
NN
OOWWPP
LLAA
YY
ININ
GG
102.7 Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
TAP
NOTA: Para hacer una búsqueda botones de volumen para restablecer el sonido.
automática, consulte
accomplished by tap anla
d hold oinformación
matically stored in the sea
continuación.
Assigning preset manually can be The current station will be auto- After the preset stations have The selection will be highlighted
TUUNNIN
INGG n lected en set simply tap on them to TT
TO MAcbheIaN MENU OOaM
nM
d tAeIN
AhIN
M1
staM
MtiEoEnNN
wiU
Ull change. FM M1M1 FMFM
the available slot slot. nge the station.
RADIO
DIORADIO 11M:1015: 0P5MPM
11: 05 P RADIR
RADIO
OADIO
1015: 0P5MPM
11: 0511P:M RADIO RAR
DA DIO
IO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RAR
RADIO DA DIO
IO :1015: 0P5MPM
11: 051P1M RAR
DA DIO
IO 11:1015: 0P5MPM MAM
INAIM
NEM
NEUNU 11:1015: 0P5MPM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA
1011100.212.7
.7 010
11 101
.1 .1
1.1 11.07
011.1
.1 1011200.272.7 .7 110022.7 .7
NOTAS:
102
1
m hz m hz m hmzhz m hz PHOTO m hmzhz MUM
SUICSIC PHP
OHTO
OTO
m hz m hz m hzm hz m hz m hz MUSIC
TATPAP
m hz
Ki ss FM K-aErat h r th K-KE-aErat h r th Ki ss FM TAP KiKssi sF
sM FM
K- EaKritshs FM K- EKa-rE
th Ki ss FM Ki ssKFi sMs FM
menú anterior.
P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2 P3 P3 P3 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2 P3 P3 P3 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2P3 P3 P3 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P2 P3 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3
RADIO VIDEO RAR
DA DIO
IO VIDVEID
OEO
P4 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
HHolodld
Ki ss FM Kost KBi g
TAP Hold Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng HH olodld TAP
Sl ow j am s Sof t Rock
TATPAP
Toque el iconosctaaBúsqueda
tions, pausing momentautomática (Auto
Auto scan mode will automati- The scan will stop everytime they It w press It will stop when it reaches the
automáticamente la siguiente estación Los auriculares funcionan como una antena para
fore finding the next.
43
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO DE RADIO FM (CONTINUACIÓN)
1 2
RADIO
RADIO ASA
SISGSNIGIN
NGINPGRP
ESRETSET SELSECLETC
INTGING
PRP
ESRETSET
RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
A A SCAN A SCAN
AN A A
SCAN SC
SA
CNAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN SCAN
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz
Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7
D D
HOL HcOL c
2 Se2 Se
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9
TAP TAP
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10130.5
3.5
Kost Kost
m hz m hz 10140.3
4.3 KBi g KBi g
m hz m hz 10180.0
8.0 m hz m hz
TARPi cT
kA
DRP
ei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Sl ow jSalm
ows j am s TAP TAP
Sof t RSoocfkt Rock
OROR
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
44
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO GRABACIÓN DE VOZ
List Item 5 08/ 19
Record Icon
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
List Item 6 08/ 19
PANTALLA DE VOZ
Go to Music NOW PLAYING List Item 7 08/ 19
Now Playing
Pantalla de grabación
Botón Grabar/Detener
Recording Screen
(Record/Stop) Hacia atrás (Un
paso)
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE
Icono de la papelera
Borrar archivos Ir al
Go tmenú
o List Menude
Lista
Trash Icon
Delete Files
000
00: 0:/300:
100
(Bloqueo) (Bloqueo)
Rewind (hold) Fast Forward (Hold)
Reproducir/Pausar
Play/Pause Button
Select L
RECORD
TO RECORD
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
00: 27 / 03: 25
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO RADIO RADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO
00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 1E
2: 45 PM AUDIOBOOK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOIC SETTINGS
TAP NOWNP
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING OLW
AYPILNAGYING NOW PLAYING
45
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
G
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC00: 27 / 03: 25 11: 05 PM 00: 27 / 03: 25
4 of 14
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO GRABACIÓN DE VOZ (CONTINUACIÓN)
3 4
Toque el icono Grabar (Record) (q) para Cuando haya terminado de grabar, toque el
comenzar la grabación. Hable en el icono Detener (Stop) ( X ).
micrófono, ubicado en el extremo inferior
izquierdo de la unidad, para que el
reproductor cree una grabación de voz.
5 6
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
RECORD
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 07PM
00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
00: 27 / 03: 25
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TA
: 2P8PM TA
00: 31 / 02: 29 TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12
TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 120:02:83P
1M/ 02: 29 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 2P8PM
00: 31 / 02: 29
08/ 19/ 2008 0088
/ 1/91/ 2 08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 90/028008 12: 45PM
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45P
12:M
15 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
grabaciones de voz.
the touch screen
la grabación elegida.
button to navigate the screen.
MUSIC PHOTO
46 RADIO VIDEO
7 8
47
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO GRABACIÓN DE VOZ (CONTINUACIÓN)
1 2
RECORD
DELETE RECORDING
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 11: 05 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM DELETE? 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 05PM
08/ 19/ 2008
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 10PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM TAP
NO YES YES
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TAP
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM
TAP 00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
TAP
12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM OK 08/ 19/ 2008 01: 25PM
TAP
Mientras recse
ording. encuentrabuttoen
ns or the toel
uch scremodo Seleccione lausingrabación
g the touch screen or hque desea borrar;
This will bring you to a delete Once the action is completed it
Tap the trash icon to delete a
papelera; aparecerá en la pantalla la Lista operación. En esa pantalla, elija SÍ para borrar
buttons. rding.
NOTAS:
• Asimismo, puede usar los botones Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up), Derecha/Abajo
(Right/Down) y Centro (Center) en lugar de los iconos m, l y ® respectivamente para
navegar y seleccionar los elementos, tal como se muestra en la sección Video.
• Ajuste el nivel de volumen como se explica en la página 24.
48
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO LIBRO DE AUDIO
PANTALLA DEL LIBRO DE AUDIO
1 2
MAIN MENU
AUDIOBOOK
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r
NAVIGATING AUDIOBOOK MENU THE AUDIOBOOK
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM AUDIOBOOK 11: 05 PM
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOAIC
UE
DIOBOOKAUDIO
SB
ET
OTOIK
NGS SETTINGS Nor wegViOaICnE WoAoUd
DIOBOOK SETTINGS
NOW N
PO APYI NG
LTA
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING W PLAYING Nor wegi an WN
oOodW PLAYI NG
TAP
Libro de audio.
49
Ref er ence.
4 of 14
Now Pl ayi ng 00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
00: 27 / 03: 25
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO LIBRO DE AUDIO (CONTINUACIÓN)
3 4
Navegue por la lista y toque el nombre de Si desea pausar la reproducción del libro,
un libro de audio; el libro de audio elegido toque el icono p u oprima el botón Centro
se abrirá y comenzará a reproducirse (Center). Toque el icono ® u oprima el
automáticamente. botón Centro (Center) para reanudar la
reproducción un libro de audio.
5 6
Toque el icono m o el l para regresar a Toque el icono > o el < para regresar a
la capítulo anterior o avanzar hacia la siguiente. la título anterior o avanzar hacia la siguiente.
Aparecerá una ventana emergente para que
confirme el cambio de capítulo. Elija SÍ para ir
al siguiente capítulo o NO para reanudar la
reproducción en la posición anterior.
50
FUNCIONAMIENTO–MODO LIBRO DE AUDIO (CONTINUACIÓN)
NOTAS:
• Guardará toda la última posición de repetición de cada libro. Así que puede reasumir a la
última posición de la repetición de cada libro.
• Consulte las páginas 15 a 21 para saber cómo cargar archivos del libro de audio a la unidad.
• Puede tocar el icono Volver (Return) para regresar al menú anterior.
• Si desea pausar la reproducción del libro, toque el icono p u oprima el botón Centro
(Center). Toque el icono ® u oprima el botón Centro (Center) para reanudar la reproducción.
• Asimismo, puede usar los botones Izquierda/Arriba (Left/Up), Derecha/Abajo (Right/Down) y
Centro (Center) en lugar de los iconos m, l y ® respectivamente para navegar y
seleccionar los elementos, tal como se muestra en las dos páginas anteriores.
• Ajuste el sonido como se explica en la página 24.
51
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN
INGRESARMAL MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN
1 2
SETTINGS
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease
NAVIGATION
AIN MENU SELECTION MAIN MENU MAIN MENU
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
SET TINGS NAVIGATION
MAIN MENM
U AIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU
SETTINGS
THE SETTINGS L
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
ConNOWla unidad
navigate the sencendida,
creen using Push the backoprima onentou rietetumrnwel
ith habotón Toque el icicono CONFIGURACIÓN
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
You can navigate the screen using Pus
W PLAYITN
AG
P VOICE AUDIOBOOK
F ORMAT
SETTINGS
When making a selection, hold OKThis action will highliFgOhRt M
DEFAULT
thAeT
DEFAULT
You can continue to use the This action will highlight thethe toucTh esccryecelne for the menu itemys ou
de Configuración.
e touch screen you to the list.
Yo u c a n n
u can use the left or right av i g a te t h e s c re e n u s i n g Pu s h t h e n to return
the touch screen you to the list.
button to navigaYtoeutchaensucsreetehne. left or right
button to navigate the screen.
1 2
G
*N
*N OO
TTEE! !!:! :PPl el e
aa ser er e
se f ef e
r rt ot oLL
ISIS
TTNN
AAVVIG
IGAA TTIO
IONNOO
NNNN
AAVV
IG IG
AATTININ
GG
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
BVRIG
V IIG ATTTIO
GAH IOENN
N SS TT
HH
MAIN MENU
EESSEETT TT INI1NG G
S
1: 05SPML I ST MENUS.
LIST MENUS. MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM BRIGHTMN
USIE
C SS 11: 05 PM
BRIGHTNESS
4 of 14
N1o1:w
05 PP
M la yi ng
111: 011
5: 01P
: 05
5M EPTM
PSM TINGS 11: 05SP
EMTTIN
SGES
TTINGS
SETTINGS
1E1T: 0
S TI5NP
1M
G1: 05 PM
S
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SESTETSTIE
NTTSINGS
TIG
NGS SETTINGS 111: 0
15: 0P
5MPM 11: 05 PM SETS
TEIN
TGTISNGSSETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 0151:P0M
11: 05 PM
511P:0M5 PM SETST
EITN
TIG
NSGS BA1C
1:10:K
1 50PLIGHT
5MPM SETTINS
00: 27 / 03: 25
GESTTI NGS 11:05 PM 11: 05 PM
S BRIGHTNESS
BB
RR IG
IGHH
BTRT
NNEHE
SSSESSS IBGIRH NSEA lSlIGS
HToNn gSs BB
RR IG
IGHHTBT
NRN
EESHS
S SREIGSHSTNESS 6 1
IG TN BRIGHTNESS BB
RR GIH
GN
T HN
T TS
EE SR
B
S ES IG TBN BBRRIIG
GH
HT
TNNEESSSS
POWER SAVINGS
BRIGHB
TN
REIG
SS
HTNESS
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
BACKLIGHT ROCK SHUFFLE
5
BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT
5 2
PHOTO 6 1
T6AP 1
66 6 11 1
Ar6t i st 1
6
6
1
1 6
6
1
SE1 T TIME
6 1
6 1
PHOTO
POWER SAVINGS TA
TAPP
INGS PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAVVIN
INGGSS 5 5 2 5 Al bu6m 2 PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAV5VIN
INGGS6S 2 5 5 2 5 2 2
3 3
SET TIME 5 5 2
RADIO VIDEO
55 5 65 5 22 2 5 6 2 RADIO VIDEO
5 5 LANG
2 UAGE 5 2 2
SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3
Ge3 nr e 3 SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3 3 3 3 3
VIDEO LANGUAGE
VIDEO
3 3 33 3 33 3 3 3 3 DE
3 FAULT Weezer 3 3
TAP The Bl ue Al bum
DEFAULT LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE Pl ayl i st LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE 4. Buddy Hol l y
TA
FORMATP OK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
AUDIOBOOK
DIOBOOK
SETTINGS
FORMAT
SETTINGS DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT NOW PLAYING
OK OK DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT OK NOW PLAYING OK OK
You can use the Hard Buttons
P
OO
WWPPLLAA
YY ITNG KO
KK
TA
ITN G FF
OORR
MM TTOK
AA OO FFOO
RRMM AA TT OK
TAP
You can also chO anKge the setting toOcKycle through the Brightness
AAPP
You can use the Hard Buttons
to cycle through the Brightness You can also cT ha an pgtehteheNsoew ttinPglayinbgy idciorenctalyt p
threessing on the level settings of which there are 6
TAP
mTsAPoonf tthhee scrYeoeuncaanndailtsowcilhl ange the setting
E
SSSS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS
BR BR BR BR BR
H
TT
6 1 6 1
52
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
6 1 6 1 6 1
A
VV IN
INGGSS
5
5
55 2
2
5
5
66 2
2
5
5
66 2
2 5
5
55 2
2
5
5
22 2
2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
E
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN (CONTINUACIÓN)
AJUSTE
BABCAKCLKIDE GTHTLA LUZ DE FONDO
1 2
T
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
HT 11: 05 PM LGIH SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC G
ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF
ON ON ON ON ON
INGS BABCAKC
LKIG
LH
IG
THT
HT 15 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 3
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
15 3 15 15 15 15 3
LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF ALAWAYLS
WAYS seO FF LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF sec ALWA LS
ALY WAYSOFF O FF LS
ALWAY WAYSO
sec OsFeFc OsFeFc sec AYS OFOF FFc OsFeFc eANcYS OsFeFc
H
SATVINGS
11: 05 PM
BABCPAKOPC
LOKIEW
W
SETTINGS
ISRGATSsVH
GRLEH ec
A
INV
ALWAYS
TGINSGS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
OO
LW
N
ON
NON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON sO
W
O
N
11: 05 PM
ON ON
10 5 10
1s5ec 1
se5c 3 15 1155
sec
1L5W
A 15c5YS 3 33
seA
10
1515 15AA
sec
LW L5Y
LAW
A W
seA
SAYS3 3 3
c YS
10
15 1155ALW
sec ALW
AALY
W5
ScAYYSS3 33
seA
10
15 1155ALW
sec
AA LY
W5
SAYS3 33
s3
ec
15 15 3
S sec sec
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sseecc
secON sec sec sseecc sescecsec
OO
NN ON sescecsec sec sseecc
ONO ONN sec sseecc sec sseecc
ON ON sec sseecc
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sec
secs
E 11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
SET
ST
TIEME
SG
EITNTIEN
STG
TS
INGS 11: 05 PM SETSINTSG
TE TES
BACKLIGH
ITNTGIN
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM NS
SESTETTIT ES
IG
NGTS
BACKLIGH
TINGS
T P1M
111:10:505 1:M
P 05 PM SETS SG
TIENTTES
ITNTG
IN
BACKLIGH
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM SIENS
SETT E
TSITNTG
TG IN
SGS 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
10 5 10 1100 5 55 1010 10 55 5 10 1100 5 55
TAP 10 1100 5 55 10 10
ESS LALNAGNU GAUG
BAAG
E E
sec sec
BAB
CA
sec sseecc
KBC
LAK
IC
GLK LTIHGTHT
HIG
sec sseecc
BB
AACC
sescecsec
KBK
LAL
IC
G KLTITGHT
HH
sescecsec
BAB
CAKBC
LAK
IC
GLK
s
sec secec sec sseecc
LTIHGTHT
HIG BAC
BK
sec sec sec sseecc
BL
AIKC
s
GLK
e c
HILG
TIH
GTHT
sec sec
BACKBLAIC
GK
H
s
GE ALWAYS
CK LIGHT
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
IG
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
A C
OFF
TAPTAP
ON ON ON ON ON
HN
TGS BACBKALCIKGL
HITGH T TAP
DED
FEA15F TL1O
UALU T5K 3 AALYW
15 ALW ASLAA
WY
AYS
OK 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 AA LW
LAW
OK
AYAAA Y
WS
SYLS 3
AYOSFOFFF OFF
AALYW
15 ALW
OK
ASLAA
WY
AYS 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 ALWAYASL3WAYS
OK 3 ALWAYASLWAYOSF
sec ALWAYS OFsF
ec sec ALW YS sec sec LW sec sec ALW YS sec sec ALWAYS OFFOFsO
FFF
ec
sOe
Nc ON OONNON ON
ON ON
ON ON OONN ON ON s
Oe cN
NO ON ON
AVINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GIS NGS TAP
You cFaonF rumosreamt1t51h
a0 te Ha1O r55dKBut3tons 15 15 1015 A1O KO
L5W 1K
5A OK
Y5S 3 3 3 151510 1 A5A
LWLO
W O
A K
Y
5
A
O
LK
YWSK
S AYS33 3 You can a15ls1o A5c
101
5 AO
Lh
W La
AWK
n
YLOOgK
W
5S
A
KeSYtS3he
YA 3 3setting 15 15 101A5LWAY OKO
L3S OK
WAYS
5 K
3 3 3 15 15 3 KO
O
escec sec sec sescescec sec
sec sec secsec You can alssesocesceccsh
ec
aOnONsNg
ec
eONthsesececsseectting sec sescec sec sec sec sec sesce
scec sec
ON ON sec secsec sec sec
to cyScEleTStTE hIT
rM osTuE IgMhEth seec Bacskelcight secON by directlysepc reOsNsOinNOgN onsetcheTAlPeTvAPel sT
eAcP sec s
by touching t1h01e0 a10rro5 5ws5 on thTeAP
Ingrese en el menú de Ajustes (Settings) como se Toque el tiempo deseado para la OK luz de fondo.
setYtionugscaonf w usheicts1heh0c ethHears5eercdaBreut6tons YouYocuancaunseusts1eeh0c e1t0hsHeaH a5rBd5uBttuotntos ns
5rd
anegtehTetAhsPe tsteinttging
10
sec ec sec secsec sescec sec sescec sec
10
You can as1e0lcss1oe0csecchs5eac sn5ecg
5
sece the setting
Yocuancaanlssa1oe0clssc1eo0h
You acn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
10 5 5 5
csec sec secsec
10
sec
10 5
sec se
botYtooumco f tahlesosccrheaenngO eRthe setting You Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn hg
E levteoL c. yNLcG
lsA lAeU
NtA hGG rUoEAuGghE the Backlight to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethBeacBkalcigkh ligt ht an by directly pressing on the level bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein ssgTin
Aog
Pnotn
hethlevlelvel TA
muestra Fen laat página 52. Toque OlaKOKOKopción LUZ DE OOKKOSeleccione la opción KeKthe setting APAGADO KK (OFF) para
bybtoy utoch
uicnhgintghethaerraorw roswosnotnhethe
setsteinttgins gosf o
wfhwichhicth eth reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the TAPTAP
eeOnROTRAP
settings of which there are 6
elFsDA. EUFLATULOTK OK bottom of tO hKe screen OR thf eO
thK
leDvE levlelvse. ls. bobttootmtom
of o secrsecern
VINGSajustes.
levteolscEl
. ycle tajuste
hrough the Bde acklighla luz
to ctyoclceyde rfondo cdetermina
khltight boYttooumcaonf tahel
o change the setting
Cuando ytermine,
tboyuctohuincghitnhge tahreroawrtoque rsoowns tohne the el icono Aceptar (OK).
through the Backlight by directly pressing on the level TAP TAP TAP TAP
setYtoinugcsaonf uwsheicthethHearredaBreut6tons YouYcoauncuasneuth HaBrudttBountstons by touching the arrow
see tHhaerd You can also change the setting YouYcoauncaaln entghee tsheettsinegtting
S POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS
SIN
SETTS ETTINGS 11: 051111
P::M
05 PM TSEET TINGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M SETTSET TINGS 11: 05111
P: 05 PM
1:M
SETT SIG
NGS 11:10151: 01
P5:M
05 PM SETSTESIT
ET TINGS 11:151:1
01 P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
ETGTSINGS SETS IN
TGTS INEG
TS SET
ST
EITNTG NTGIS
AJUSTE
11: 05 PM
DE LA
05 PM
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS
1 2
P
15OWER SAVI NGS POP
W
1PO
EW
5O WES
R ERA
RV
SSIAN
AVV
IIN
G NGGSS
S P
15O
POW
P EW
OR E
WSR
EARVS A
AV
SIN GIIS
V N
NGGS
S PO
PW
15PW
OOW
ER EA
S
ERRSVA
SIV
AIV
N NIS
G N
GSGS POP5P
1WOO
E W
WR E
ESRSVS
RA A
VV
AIN NIS
IG N
GGSS PO
POW WS
ER EA
R
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
min min min min min
VHNITN
GSGS BABCAKC
LKIG
LH
IG
THT
10 10 1 10 15 1 10 15 1 10 15 1 10 1 1
15 1155 O 15 1155 15 1515 15 1515 15 15
mFi nF
min 15
m in
min
min
OFF
min
m i nm n OFFOFF
miin
min
min
min m min
min
i n OFF OOmFFFFi n min
m im inni n
nm im
Fm
OFO Oi n
FF
FF min
m i nmmi ni n
min
OiFnF
OFFOm
FF min min
AAVVININGSGS POPPW
11: 05 PM O EW
OPWOR
EW
REESRAASSVVAIANIVNV
SR G IGNSGS
G
INS
SETTINGS
5 2
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
5
10 1100
2
10m11
11: 05 PM
0 1 11
SETTINGS
5
10 1100 15 m 1125
11: 05 PM
1 1
SETTINGS
5
10 1010
11: 05 PM
15m12i51 5 1 11
SETTINGS
5
10 1010
2
15m1
11: 05 PM
15 1 1 1 10 10 1
1
m0i n 1i0n
m 1 min i5
n min i5n 1 min n min in
S min
OWER SAVm INi1nG
min m i nmmi ni n
POWER SAVm
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min m in
m i n m i nm i n m i n m i n
m i nGS
min m i nm im
POWER SAVm
n
in
m i ni n m i n m i nm imn i n m i nmm
in
POWER SAVm
in
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min min
m i nm
11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
NSTG
SETTSIE
P
ETSTIN
TIGNSGS
S 1:05 PM
1: 0511P1:M
05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTSESG
IN TET
P
STIT
NIG
O
NS
W
GS
E R S A V I N
11:M
11: 051P 1
0:50P
5MPM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING1S 1: 05 P1M
1: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
5 55 2 22 5 5 2 2 5 55 2 22 5 55 2 22 5 5
SS BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
5
min
2
min m i nmmi ni n m i nmmi ni n min m
5
in
min min min
2
min m i nm im
n
in m i nm im
n TAP
in m i nmm
in
in m i nmm
in
in min min
GE LALNAGNUG AU
P1GAE
5OWGEE
R SAVINGS
OFF
POP
W PEO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
15OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
P1P
POW EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
PO
P1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POP1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POWP
EO
RW EV
SAR
min min min min min
NTGS BACBKALCIK
GLHITGHKT TAP TAPTAP
DED
FEAF10A
U LUTLTO10 15 1 10 15 115515
OK 1 10 15 115155
OK 1 10
OK
15 1155 15 1 10
OK
15 151 15 1 15 15
OF
mFi n OFF OFF OFF
OFF OF i nF OFF OFF OFF OFF min O
min
mi ni n
m min
i ni n OFmFi n
mi nm
m i nm m i n m i n mm
mi niinn m min
mi ni nm i n OFmFi n
min
m min
ni n OFmFi n
mi nim
m i nm min
VINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GISNGS TAP
YouFcO aF nROMuRsAeMTm1tmA T 1O
05he Ha 20K
rd Bumt1itnons 10 10510 1O
0K O
1m
O KK
251 0 1 1 1 OKO OK K
10 10150 15 125 15 1 1 1 You can alms10ionm1m0in5cinm1h0ina1n K25O
O51g
O
m ie
K1K
5 1 1 1
n the setting
10 105 10 1 O5K O O1K
12 K 5 1 1 1 10 10 1 KO
O
nTiA
i ni n min m i nmm i ni n in m i n mm
i niinn m i n m m i n P m i nm i nm i n
i nm
m im
min min min
n i n min
m
mi ni nm i n mm
i ni n m i n m i nm i nm i n m i n m i nmm
i nim
n in
m im min min min
min m
to cSyEcTlS eTEtIhTMrToEIuM gE h tmhien Power You can also chanmgien the setting by directly pressinmgi non the TlAePvTAePl n
savYin 5
erame2irndarBeu6ttons Yocuancaunseumst5e tinmhHineam2H
5 5 2
a2 rBdinuBttuotntos ns by touching mt5ihn e5ma5inrmr2ion w2ms2in on thTeAP 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5
og uscoafnwuhseicmthihn tehH You ih
nme irnd You can alsmoinmicn mhinamninmginemT Yocuancaanlsaomlsicnmoh cinhn mg
ainnemigntmehinethse tsteinttging
anegteheA
m i nm min min thPe setting You
in i na
m
TAP
min
T
min m
E levtLeolAsc.NLyG ANGG
clUeAth
UEAGE
rough the Power to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethPeoP woew r er botYtooumcof tahlesosccrheaenngO
an eRthe setting Yobu Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
y directly pressing on the level
hg thse tsteinttging bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein s sg i nognotnhethlevlelvel
bybtoy utoch
uicnhgintghethaerraorw roswosnotnhethe
savsianvgins gosf o
wfhwichhicth eth reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the TAPTAP
eeOnROTR AP
sDaEvFiD nAE
gUFsLAoTUfw LO ThKich there are 6 O K
levels. levlelvse. ls. bottom of thOeKscreen OR bobttootmtom
of o thf etOhsKecrsecern OK
muestra en la página 52. Toque la opción AHORRO energía. Seleccione la opción APAGADO (OFF)
savings of which there are 6 savisnagvsinogfswohf iw
chhtichherteheare a6re 6 by touching the arrows on the by tboyuctohuincghitnhge tahreroawrrsoowns tohne the
bottom of the screen OR bottboomttoom f thoef tshceresecnreOeRn OR
pantalla de ajustes. Esta función establece el período Cuando termine, toque el icono Aceptar (OK).
de tiempo que la unidad permanecerá encendida
antes de apagarse debido a inactividad.
53
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN (CONTINUACIÓN)
the Minute change from AM and PM. hour
AJUSTE DE LA HORA
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
TIME SET TIME SET
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTISNEGTSTINGS 11: 051P1M
: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS 111: 0: 055PPMM SEST
SET
ETITN
TTIG SG
INNGSS 111:10115::00P55MPPM
M SS
SE
E ETTT
T IIN
ITN GG
N SS
GS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS
ESS SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
1112
SET TIME
0055 PPM 11
251 LDTIME
SET
HO
005065 PP
MM
P M 1
321 0055
25 PM SE1
T1TIME 05 AM 1111 4055 APMM S1
E2T TIME05 PM M
T TAP TAP TAP TA
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
AVINGS
D
HOL
DE
1F
1AULT05 DE1F2AULT 05
D PM 12 05 PM PM 11 06 PM 11 05 AM
HOL TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP
OK FORMAT OK OO
KK FORMAT OK O
OKK OO
KK
OK OKK
O
E
Ingrese
time cen
hange el menú de Ajustes (Settings) Toque la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo de
TAP
rrow to go Back in TU
apsinthgetu
hpeh
ararrodwbtuottaodnvsaynocue cthan
e Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrroow
w ttoo aaddvvaannccee tthhee TTaTap
apptththh
eeedduoopw anraraorrrw
wn twotto
roow aodggvoaonBBcaaeccktkhiinen TTaapp tthhee ud upopwoarn
rrdoaow
rrwotn
hsoeutrtheTtAP e but without control the hour
im hMoiunrute TAP tthh
heoehuMor iu
Rnraupteidly TAP ctM
hieannhugoteeufrrRoampiAdM ly a
opción AJUSTE DE LA HORA (SET TIME); presionada la opción para configurar la hora
ap the u in w to
hour the hour Minute the Minute change from AM and PM.
3 4
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS 111: 0: 055PPMM SESTETTIN
TIG
NSGS 111: 015: 0P5MPM S
SEETTTTIIN
NGGS
S 1111::0055 P
PMM SES
TETTTG
IN INSGS
E
TT
IMTEIME SETLTDSEET TIME SETSTEIM
TE
TIME SETDSTETETIME
HOL0350
SET TIME IM SET TIME SET TIME IM SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
5 HO 05 PM 3 05 PM 52
1 PPD
LM
M 311 02
55 PP
MM 121 3005 AD
P M 111 25
45
HO HOL
1OLD30 06 1P PM 11 HOLD05
D
505 1P1MPM 05 PM 3 12 05 05 1P2M PM 05 12 1H MPM 05
2D PM 11 11 25 05 1P1MAM 06 L1D
HO1A M AM11 45 AM
HOL
PM 05
TAP TAP TAP
OK OK O
OKK OO
KK OK OO
KK
TAP
Dw to advance the
Tap the upHaOrLro vvD TUapsin
thgetdhoewhnaradrrbouw
HOL
Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrrooww ttoo aadd aannccee tthhee TTaapptthheeddoow wnnaarrrroow
wttooggooBBaacckkiinn Tap the up arrow to advance the
TAP TAP TAPtthheehM ThA
teP O thseetM
thineuttim eabpuid
t lw
hour Rapidly TAP the hour Rapidly hMoiunruRteapRiadplyidly oiunruRteapRiadplyidly TMap
intu RaKpbidultyton to confirm the eR y
OKOK OK OK OK OK OKOK OK OK OK OK OK OK time change OK over individual hrs
just cycle through
Toque la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo de Toque la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo de
TAP
devtuaopngcaoerrBtohawecktoinaTdavpTaatnhpceeth
dteo up or down arroBwactkoin Using the hard buttons you can
w
Taatp
rorotahwdevtuo
apngcaoerrBtohawe
cktoinaTd
apvaTtnahcpeetdh
tohew
eunpaarTrarop
owwthttoeogdaoodw
B cakcreirnoth
vann wetoTagpToatBp
haetchukepindaorrwonw
Taatprortoahw hwe n arTraopwthtoe gdoown arrow to go Back in Tap the up or down arrow to
the Mhoinuur tReapidltyhe hour Min thueteMRin ap uitdely Minute thecM hainnugteefRroam AlM
pitdh and PM.
ey Minute Tap the OK buttcohnatnogceofnrofim heand PseMt .the time but without control
rmAtM
los minutos (Minute) para configurarlos. la opción AM/PM para configurar la unidad
hour
time change over individual hrs or mins. It will
just cycle through.
SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
30 3 OPD
M
H L 05 PM 11 25 12 PM 30 PD
HOL
M 11 05 11 AM 25 PM 11
54
45 11AM 05 AM 11 45 AM
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN (CONTINUACIÓN)
5 SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11:05 PM
6
11 25 PM 11 05 AM 11 45 AM
3
HOL
D 1 2
OK OK OK
TAP
Using the hard buttons you can
CONFIGURACIÓN DE IDIOMA
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
GE LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
11: 05 PM SETTINSS
G
EES
TTTTIINNGGSS 11: 05 P11M
11::0055PPM
M SES
TE
TITNTS
IN
G GTSINGS
EST 11:1015: 0P51M1P:M
05 PM SETTINS
G
SES
ETTTTIIN
NGGSS 11: 05 P1M
111::0055PPM
M SETSTEINGIES
TT
S NTG
TS
INGS 11: 0151:P
01M
51P
: 0M5 PM SETTS
ING
ES STIN
TE
T TIGNSGS 11: 051P
11:M
015: 0P5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
ESS BRIB
GH
RITGNHETSNSESS LANGLLUA
LANGUAGE LALN
AGNLU
G
AAUA
NGGEG
UEAGE AAN
NGG
EU
G UA
AGGE
E LALNAGN
LUA
GAN
UGG
AEU
GA
EGE LANLG
LU
A AAN
N GG
GEA
U UGAE
GE LANGLUA
GS
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
T BACBKALCIG
KEH
LNITG
GLH
IST
H SPANISH ENGLISH ENGLISH SPANISH
AVINGS POW
PEOR
WSEA
RVSS
IPN
AGVISNGS SP SP SP SP
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
ENGLISH ENSG
PL
AEIN
NIH
S SL
G HISH SPANS
IS
EPNH
AGNLIIS
SHH ENEGNLE
IS
GNLH
IGSLHISH ENG
SLP
EIA
S
NNH
GILSIH
SH SPANSI
SETSTEIT
MTEIME
SP SPSP SP SP S
SPP SPSTPAP
SP SP SP
SP SP
E LANLG AUNAGGUEAGE
OK OK OK OK OK
DEFD AEUFLATULT TAP TAP TAP TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
to cyFcO leRtFM
hOrA
oTuMgAhTtheOLKanguage
R OOKKOK You can also chaOnKgeOK the setting by directly pressin OgK OoKOnKthe O TK
AO POKK OK
settings of which there are 3 by touching the arrows on the Language
T DED
FAEU
FALTULT
55
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
11: 05 PM SSEETTTTIN GG
INSESS
TTINGS 1111: 0
: 055PP
1MM
1: 05 PM SETTINS
GE
S ESTTTTIIN
NGGS
S 11: 05 P11M
11::0055 P
PMM SETTIS
NEGT
SESTITNIN
GS
GS 11: 05 1P11M
:10:505PM
PM SETTSIE
NTGTESITNTGIN
S SGS 11: 01
51P:10
M15: 0
P5MPM SETTS
INES
G
TES
TTIN
TIG
NSGS 11: 051P
11M
:0
15: 0P
5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
ESS BRIB
GH
RITGNHETSNSESS DEFAD
UE
DEFAULT D ELF
TA
F AU
ULLT
T DEFD
AD
U
EELF
FTAUU
A LL
TT DEF
DAED
U
FELTUALUTLT
AF DEFD
AD
EUF
ELA
TA
FUULTLT DEFAD
UE
NGS
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN (CONTINUACIÓN)
ttooccyycclleetthhrroouugghhtthheeLLaanngguuaaggee
You can also change the setting YbYoyouudcicrae
annaallssoocchhaannggeetthheesseettttiinngg TAP
to cycle through the Language ctly pressing on the
by toouucchhiinnggtthheeaarrrroow wssoonntthhee bbyyddiirreeccttllyypprreessssiinnggoonntthhee
by touching the arrows on the
settings of which there are 3 sseettttiinnggssooffwwhhiicchhtthheerreeaarree33 bLayntg uage LLaanngguuaaggee
levels. lleevveellss..
bottom of the screen OR bboottttoom moofftthheessccrreeeennOORR
PREDETERMINADO
1 2
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
S
DEEFFAAU
D ULLTT
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
11: 05 PM TSE
SETS ET
IN
TG
TINGS
TS
INGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M5 PM
SETTITNIN
SESTETTIN
GS
GSGS
11: 05 PM
111: 015: 0P5MPM
SE
SS
EE
TT
TT
TT
IIN
IN NGG
GS
SS
11: 05 PM
1111: 0: 055PP
MM SSE
SE
TTIN
ETTTTIIN
NG
GS
GS
S
1:10:5
111 05 P
1: 05 PPM
M
M SETTING
SSEETTTTIINNG
GS
S
S 11: 05 PM M
1111::0055PPM
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
ESS BBR
RIIG
GHHTTNNESSSS
DEE
FAULT DDEEFFAAUULLTT
DE FAULT
DEFAULT
DDEEFFAAUULLTT DDEFFAAUULLTT
DEEFAULT
DE
D
D
EFAUULLTT
EFFAAULT
DEF
DEF
NGS
HT BBNAACKKLLYIEIG
OC G
SHHTTYES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES
AVINGS PPO
OWWEER
RSSAAVVIIN
NGGSS
YES NOO YY
EESS YY
EESS NO YES YES NO YESS YESS NOO YES YES NO Y
NO YES NN
O YES YES NNOO YYEESS YYEESS N
NOO Y
YEES Y
YEES N
NO YYEESS YYEESS NO Y
SSEETTTTIIM
MEE
TAP
E LLAANNGGU
UAAGGEE
OK OK OK OK OK
TTAAPP
DDEEFFAAU
ULLTT TAP
TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
FOR RMMAATT OK OO
KKK gOeKKthe setting OK O
to cyclFeOth rou gh the Default O You can also chanO by directly pressinO gKon the Yes or OK
O
TAP
K O
settings of which there are by touching the arrows on the No TAP
TAP TAP
FORMATEAR
1 2
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
Format Format
FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
SS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENOE
FSRS
SMS
AT FOO
RRMAT FOORRM AT FORFM
FORFMATMAT FORFM ATMAT FORMOART
ATMAT
FOROMR
FORFM
AT
ATMAT FORFM
O
GS
T BABCNAKC
LKIG
LH
ING
THT YES
O O NO YES YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO NO YES
VINGS POPW
OEW
RESRAS
VA VG
IN INSGS
NO NO YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NOYES YES
NO NO Y NO NO YES
NONO NONO YESYES NONO YESYES YESYES NO ES YESYES NONO NONO YESYES NONO NO
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
TAP
LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
OK OK OK TAKP
O OK
TAPTAP
DEDFEAFUALU
TLT
TAP
You cF aOnFRuOsR
M tThAeTHO
eAM arKd Buttons Formatting will erO aK sOO
eKKall data on You can also changOeKO O
thKKe setting You can also changeO OK KthOeKsetting OK
O KOK OKO
to cycle through the Format the player by touching the arrows on the TAP by directly pressing on the Yes or TAP
settYionugscaonf w TAP TAP
usheicthhethHearerdarBeuttons
Ingrese en el menú de Configuración (Settings) como se Toque la opción SÍ para borrar todos los datos. Elija NO
YFoouYrmocuaantctaiunnsgeuw stehiletl heHeraaH
rsdearBadullBtdtuoatn osn boFtYotoorFm
ttaos n um oattfnaitntahtgliesnw
orcam osgciclw
rlheeiaelrlnnaegsO
reaRsatehlleadlsal ed tnangonNoYYoou
ttaatio
2levtoelcsy. cle through the Format Yuocucaancnaanalslasoo lscochhacanhng agneegteh
thetehsesetstteitntintgigng You
Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
ttohetcoypccllayeyctelehrrtohuroguhgth ethFeorFm oram t at tbheythtpo elaupycleahryinegr the arrows on the bbyybtoyduitroceh
ucitcnlhygip rheetshsaiernrag roosnwotshno sT
etnhYeetsheor bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrseinsgA Pgnotn TA
muestra en la página 52. Toque la opción FORMATEAR para mantener las opciones actuales.
ntg orw ino hethYe sYeosr or
settings of which there are setsteinttgins gosf o wfhwichhicth eth reearereare bottom of the screen OR bNoobttootm tom of o thf ethsecrsecern eeOnROR NoNo
2levels.
(FORMAT); aparecerá la pantalla de configuración. Al Cuando termine, toque el icono Aceptar (OK). A
2le2vlelvse. ls.
configurar la opción Formatear se borrarán todos los continuación, la unidad se reiniciará. La tarjeta de
datos cargados en la unidad, por lo tanto use esta opción memoria también será formateada si se encontraba
11: 05 PM con cuidado.
ABAO
BUOTUT
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM colocada.
Model : MMX 00891
11: 05 PM SETTS
INEGSINGS 11: 051PM
SETTIN T
GTS 11: 05 1
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM
GS Mem or ex PMP Touch
M oBC
dAeKClL:KIMLM XH0T0891
56
BA G IG
H T MoM
doed
l :eM
l :M
MXM0X00
8098
191
INGS Capaci t y: 2000 MB
M
POePW
mOE oW rReES
xRAPS
VM
A P
VG
IN IToGuSch
NS MeM
meomr eoxr ePxMPPMTPou
To uch
ch
Fr ee Space: 879 MB
C
SapTa
ES ETcTIiM
tTyIE
:M2E
000 MB CaC
pap
ciat cyi:t 2
y:02
000M
0BMB
MENÚ DE CONFIGURACIÓN (CONTINUACIÓN)
ACERCA DE
NOTAS:
• Puede tocar el icono Volver (Return) para regresar al menú anterior.
• Para ajustar la configuración también puede usar los botones Izquierda/Arriba
(Left/Up), Derecha/Abajo (Right/Down) y Centro (Center) en lugar de los iconos m,
l y ® respectivamente para navegar y seleccionar los elementos, tal como se
muestra en la sección Configuración.
57
GUÍA DE RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS
Si la unidad presenta algún inconveniente, lea la siguiente tabla antes de llamar al servicio técnico.
58
GUÍA DE RESOLUCIÓN DE PROBLEMAS
59
FORMATEAR EL REPRODUCTOR
ADVERTENCIA: No formatee el reproductor a menos que deje de funcionar
y que el personal de soporte técnico se lo indique. Al formatear la unidad, se
borrará el contenido de la memoria interna o de la externa.
LIMPIEZA:
Para limpiar la delicada superficie de la pantalla táctil, utilice el paño
incluido con la unidad.
60
REINICIAR LA UNIDAD
Si la unidad actúa erráticamente, reinicie la unidad insertando un pequeño objeto (como
un clip para papel) en el botón de Reinicio. Con respecto al botón de Reinicio, vea la
página 6 en cuanto a la ubicación. Después de reiniciar la unidad, espere 30 segundos
antes de encenderla nuevamente.
NOTA: Después de que el botón de Reinicio se presiona, puede tomar varios minutos
para llegar a la unidad de nuevo.
61
ESPECIFICACIONES
Audio Rango de frecuencia: 20Hz-20KHz
Salida para Auriculares: 8.5mW, 16ohm (Vol Máx.)
Relación Señal/Ruido: 90dB (MP3) 54dB (Sintonizador)
General
Dimensiones: 2.4 (Ancho) x 3.9 (Altura) x 0.4
(Profundidad) pulgadas
Peso: 2,3 onzas
.USB USB 2.0 Alta velocidad
Memoria Integrada: 8GB
Pila Integrada: Pila Recargable de Polímeros de Litio: 3.7V, 540mAh
Tiempo Máximo de Reproducción: aprox. 50 hrs. bajo el Modo de Reproducción de
y 3 horas bajo el modo de Reproducción de Video
Sistema Operativo Compatible: Windows XP o Vista w/ WMP11.
Temperatura en Funcionamiento: 23° F a 104° F (-5° C a 40° C)
Pantalla LCD: 2.8” (medida diagonalmente)
62
PARA OBTENER LA ACTUALIZACIÓN DEL FIRMWARE, VISITE
NUESTRO SITIO WEB EN
WWW.MEMOREX.COM
PARA REVISAR SI HAY UN FIRMWARE NUEVO DISPONIBLE.
63
TABLE DES MATIÈRES
Précautions.....................................................2 Utilisation – Mode de Lecture de photo...35
Déclaration de la FCC....................................3 • Écran de photo ........................................35
Tableau de l’EIA .............................................4 • Pour afficher les photos...........................35
Emplacement des réglages............................6 • Afficher un diaporama .............................37
Recharge de la pile ........................................7 Utilisation – Mode de Lecture vidéo.........39
Installation du logiciel..................................8 • Écran de vidéo.........................................39
• Installation du Lecteur Windows Media 11 9 • Pour visionner les vidéos ........................39
• Installation de MediaCoder ......................11 • Saut vers l’avant/arrière...........................41
• Installation de AudibleManager ...............13 • Recherche vidéo rapide...........................41
Téléchargement et transfert de fichiers........15 Utilisation – Mode Radio FM .....................42
Utilisation de MediaCoder ............................22 • Écran de radio FM...................................42
Retrait du matériel en toute sécurité ............23 • Pour écouter la radio FM.........................42
Utilisation générale ....................................24 • Balayage automatique.............................43
• Prise pour écouteurs ...............................24 • Pour ajouter et sélectionner
• Volume et sourdine..................................24 les préréglages ........................................44
• Fonction de verrouillage ..........................24 Utilisation – Mode d’Enregistreur vocal...45
• Pour allumer/éteindre ..............................25 • Écran d’enregistreur vocal.......................45
• Touche Menu ...........................................25 • Pour enregistrer/écouter des
• Pour insérer/retirer une carte enregistrements............................................45
mémoire externe (Micro SD) ...................25 • Pour supprimer un enregistrement..........48
Pour naviguer dans le menu principal Utilisation – Mode de Livre audio.............49
et les listes....................................................26 • Écran de livre audio.................................49
Menu principal ............................................28 • Pour afficher un livre audio......................49
Utilisation – Mode de Lecture musicale...29 • Basculement de l’illustration
• Écran de lecture musicale .......................29 du livre audio ...........................................51
• Pour écouter des MP3/WMA...................29 Menu de réglages .......................................52
• Saut vers l’avant/arrière...........................31 Guide de dépannage....................................58
• Recherche musicale rapide .....................31 Formatage du lecteur ...................................60
• Égaliseur (EQ) .........................................32 Réinitialisation du lecteur .............................61
• Modes de lecture .....................................33 Caractéristiques techniques .........................62
• Sélection/changement
d’illustration d’album ................................33
• Basculement de l’illustration d’album ......34
1
PRÉCAUTIONS
DROITS D’AUTEUR :
• La distribution de fichiers MP3, WMV, WMA ou WMA avec DRM sans permission constitue une
violation des lois des droits d’auteur.
• Ce produit est protégé par certains droits de propriété intellectuelle de Microsoft. L’utilisation ou
la distribution d’une telle technologie en dehors de ce produit est interdite sans une licence de
Microsoft.
SÉCURITÉ :
• Les vibrations causées par la marche ou les exercices n’affecteront pas ce lecteur. Toutefois, le
fait d’échapper ce lecteur ou de faire tomber un objet lourd sur ce dernier pourrait entraîner des
dommages et de la distorsion sonore.
• Évitez de renverser tout type de liquide sur ou dans le lecteur.
• Ne laissez pas ce lecteur à proximité d’une source de chaleur; dans un endroit exposé à la
lumière directe du soleil, à la poussière excessive, au sable, à l’humidité, à la pluie ou aux
chocs; sur une surface inégale ou dans une voiture aux vitres fermées durant les périodes de
chaleur excessive.
AVIS DE LA FCC :
• Le présent appareil peut générer et/ou utiliser de l’énergie sous forme d’ondes radio. Tout
changement ou toute modification effectué sur cet appareil peut causer de l’interférence
nuisible à moins que lesdites modifications soient autorisées de façon explicite dans le présent
guide d’utilisation. Tout changement ou modification non autorisé à cet appareil peut entraîner
l’interdiction à l’utilisateur de se servir de cet appareil.
2
DÉCLARATION DE LA FCC
Cet appareil répond aux exigences de l’article 15 des réglementations de la FCC. Son
utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) Cet appareil ne peut pas causer
d’interférence nuisible, et 2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, incluant les
interférences qui pourraient affecter son fonctionnement.
REMARQUE : Cet appareil a fait l’objet de tests qui ont déterminé qu’il est en conformité
avec les limites imposées pour les appareils numériques de la classe B, selon le chapitre
15, sur les règles de la FCC. Ces limites sont prescrites afin d’offrir une protection
raisonnable contre toute interférence préjudiciable dans une installation résidentielle. Cet
appareil produit, emploie et peut être la cause d’un rayonnement radioélectrique et, si
l’installation et l’emploi ne sont pas conformes aux instructions, risque de présenter un
brouillage nuisible aux radiocommunications.
Toutefois, il est impossible de garantir qu’aucune interférence ne sera produite par une
installation particulière. Si cet appareil est la source de brouillage nuisible à la réception des
émissions radiophoniques ou télévisuelles, déterminé en allumant et en éteignant plusieurs
fois de suite l’appareil, l’utilisateur pourra tenter de résoudre ce problème de brouillage par
une des mesures suivantes :
• Changer l’orientation ou l’installation de l’antenne de réception.
• Éloigner davantage l’appareil du récepteur.
• Brancher le cordon d’alimentation de l’appareil dans une prise ou sur un circuit séparé du
récepteur.
• Consulter le distributeur ou un technicien expérimenté en radio/TV pour assistance.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec un câble blindé afin Testé et conforme
de garantir sa conformité aux limites établies par la aux normes FCC
FCC pour les équipements de classe B. POUR L’UTILISATION À LA
MAISON OU AU BUREAU
3
Cher client,
Le fait d’avoir choisir un appareil audio d’un tel raffinement ne marque que le début de votre
plaisir d’écoute musical. Il convient maintenant de vous expliquer toutes les façons dont il
vous sera possible de maximiser le plaisir que vous procurera cet appareil. Le fabricant du
présent appareil ainsi que la division des produits grand public de l’association de l’industrie
des produits électroniques, Electronic Industries Associations’s Consumer Electronics Group,
désire que vous profitiez pleinement de votre appareil tout en écoutant la musique à un niveau
qui ne présentera aucun risque pour votre santé. Un niveau d’intensité qui permet d’obtenir
une reproduction sonore forte et claire, sans pour autant être stridente ni comporter de la
distorsion et, surtout, sans endommager votre ouïe.
Le son est parfois trompeur. Avec le temps, votre ouïe a la faculté de s’adapter à des niveaux
plus élevés. Par conséquent, ce que vous pouvez considérer « normal » peut en fait être trop
fort et endommager votre ouïe. Évitez ce piège en maintenant la commande de volume à un
niveau raisonnable et sans danger et ce, AVANT que votre ouïe ne s’y adapte.
S
ELECT
TR
EIA
IES
EST. 1924
N
S
S O
O C I A TI
5
EMPLACEMENT DES RÉGLAGES
AVANT 1. Écran tactile
2. Touches Volume Haut/Bas
3. Touche Gauche/Saut/Recherche
Haut
4. Micro (sur le côté)
1 5. Interrupteur Power/Lock
(alimentation/verrou)
6. Touche Menu
7. Touche Centre/Lecture/Pause
8. Touche Droite/Saut/Recherche Bas
5 9. Touche de réinitialisation
(ouverture sur le côté)
10. Prise pour écouteurs
6
2 (ÉCOUTEURS - PIÈCE N°
7
CTEAREDFD00873B-0-00*)
3 8
11. Fente pour carte mémoire
4 9
Micro SD
12. Port USB (CÂBLE USB - PIÈCE N°
CTPCLUSBZY00500-0-00 (blanc)*
BAS CTPCLUSBZY00400-0-00 (noir)*)
13. Couvercle de port USB/
fente pour carte mémoire
10
11
CHIFFON POUR ÉCRAN - PIÈCE N°
12
CNPCFMEMO808000-0-00*
13
*Pièces de rechange disponibles
(voir page 63 pour commander).
6
RECHARGE DE LA PILE
Cet appareil est muni d’une pile au lithium-polymère rechargeable Pile
intégrée. Lorsque l’indicateur (sur l’afficheur) vous prévient que la pile est pleine
faible (voir Figure 1), et avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois, Pile
faible
rechargez la pile en procédant ainsi :
Figure 1
Connectez le câble USB au port USB situé sur cet appareil (tel
qu’illustré), puis au port USB de votre ordinateur;
“CONNECTING” apparaîtra sur l’écran. La pile se charge
pendant que l’appareil est connecté au port USB.
REMARQUES :
• Pour déconnecter cet appareil de votre ordinateur, assurez-vous de suivre la procédure
de “Retrait du matériel en toute sécurité” à la page 23.
• Vous devez charger cet appareil pendant trois heures avant de l’utiliser pour la
première fois.
• La charge complète de la pile prend environ 4 heures. Lorsqu’elle est chargée
complètement, l’appareil peut être utilisé pendant environ 50 heures en mode Lecture
musicale et 4 heures en mode Vidéo. (L’autonomie peut varier.)
• Pour transférer des fichiers, utilisez le câble USB pour relier l’appareil à votre
ordinateur.
• Lorsque la pile est complètement vide et connectée à l’ordinateur pour la recharge, il
peut s’écouler plusieurs minutes avant que l’écran “CONNECTING” s’affiche.
7
INSTALLATION DU LOGICIEL
CD d’installation du logiciel (PIÈCE N° CTPCDMEMO085001-0-00*)
Information générale
Cet appareil est compatible avec Microsoft Windows XP (Home ou Professional Edition,
avec Service Pack 2 ou supérieur) ou Vista. MediaCoder est compatible avec Microsoft
Windows XP et Vista.
8
INSTALLATION DU LECTEUR WINDOWS MEDIA 11
L’installation du Lecteur Windows Media 11 vous permet de transférer des fichiers MP3,
WMA, WMA avec DRM 10 et photos sur votre lecteur en utilisant la fonction
“Synchroniser”.
REMARQUE : Cet appareil n’est pas compatible avec le LWM 10.
9
INSTALLATION DU LECTEUR WINDOWS MÉDIA 11 (SUITE)
4. Lisez le Contrat de licence, puis cliquez sur
“J’accepte”.
5. L’installation se poursuivra.
10
INSTALLATION DE MEDIACODER
Procédure d’installation de MediaCoder
11
INSTALLATION DE MEDIACODER (SUITE)
4. L’écran “Installation Folder” (“Dossier
d’installation”) apparaîtra. Il est recommandé
de laisser le dossier tel quel. Cliquez ensuite
sur “Install” (“Installer”); le programme sera
alors installé.
12
INSTALLATION DE AUDIBLEMANAGER
AudibleManager est un logiciel vous permettant de télécharger et d’écouter des
livres audio Audible. Utilisez AudibleManager pour transférer les livres audio sur
votre TouchMP AudibleReady ®.
Avant d’installer AudibleManager, veuillez vous assurer que votre ordinateur est
équipé de Microsoft Windows XP ou Vista avec le LWM11.
13
INSTALLATION DE AUDIBLEMANAGER (SUITE)
REMARQUE :
Le compte de connexion pour AudibleManager est limité à trois appareils et quatre
bureaux. Si vous ne respectez pas cette limite, vous obtiendrez un message
d’erreur et vous ne pourrez pas lire le fichier de livre audio.
14
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS
FORMATS DE FICHIERS MÉDIAS COMPATIBLES
Format audio : MP3, fichiers WMA avec DRM 10 d’un débit binaire de 48-192 kbits/s
Formats vidéo : AVI-MPEG4 : Simple Profile (résolution 320x240, 20-24 images/s,
385 kbits/s); WMV : VC-1 Simple Profile (résolution 320x240, 20-24 images/s,
385 kbits/s max.)
Format photo : Fichiers JPEG de base.
16
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS (SUITE)
5. Votre navigateur s’ouvrira sur audible.com.
Créez un compte et achetez un livre, ou
connectez-vous à votre compte pour afficher
“My Library” (“Ma bibliothèque”).
MÉMOIRE INTERNE :
L’appareil est équipé d’une mémoire interne de
5 Mo. Assurez-vous de ne pas dépasser cette
capacité, ou le message d’erreur de droite
s’affichera.
17
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS (SUITE)
CONVERSION D’UN CD AUDIO AU FORMAT MP3 OU WMA
Avec Windows XP, vous pouvez aussi utiliser le Lecteur Windows Media 11 installé précédemment
pour convertir les pistes musicales d’un CD audio en fichiers MP3 ou WMA en procédant ainsi :
1. Ouvrez le navigateur du Lecteur Windows Media 11, puis cliquez sur l’icône “Extraire” dans la
barre d’outils du haut. Insérez un CD musical dans le lecteur de CD de votre ordinateur.
2. Assurez-vous d’être connecté à Internet, puis démarrez le Lecteur Windows Media (LWM).
Lorsque vous êtes connecté à Internet, la LWM tente de récupérer les informations de média
telles que les noms d’album et d’artiste des pistes en cours d’extraction à partir de la base de
données Windows Media entretenue par Microsoft. Le LWM ajoute ensuite ces informations
aux fichiers pendant l’extraction. Si les informations de média sont incorrectes ou absentes,
vous pourrez les ajouter ou les modifier après l’extraction. Pour plus d’informations sur l’ajout
ou l’édition d’informations de média, consultez la section
d’aide du Lecteur Windows Media sur la page Web du LWM.
18
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS (SUITE)
5. Insérez un CD audio dans le lecteur de CD, puis cliquez sur
l’onglet Extraire, tel qu’illustré. Par défaut, le LWM démarre
l’extraction du CD automatiquement lorsque vous êtes dans
l’onglet Extraire ou que vous accédez à celui-ci après
l’insertion du CD. Vous pouvez choisir de démarrer
l’extraction immédiatement après l’insertion du CD, ou
désactiver l’extraction automatique à partir de l’onglet Extraire
de la musique, dans la boîte de dialogue Options. Veuillez
noter que toutes les chansons sont sélectionnées pour
l’extraction si vous ne les avez pas extraites
précédemment.
8. Une fois les fichiers chargés sur l’appareil, vous pouvez suivre les procédures de “Retrait du
matériel en toute sécurité” présentées à la page 23.
REMARQUE : Pour plus de détails, veuillez consulter la page d’aide de Microsoft pour le
LWM11 : http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
19
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS (SUITE)
TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS MP3/WMA/VIDÉO/PHOTO ET FICHIERS WMA
AVEC DRM 10 À L’AIDE DU LECTEUR WINDOWS MEDIA 11
Pour transférer des fichiers MP3/WMA/PHOTO/VIDÉO/WMA avec DRM 10 sur le
lecteur, suivez cette procédure en utilisant le LWM (Lecteur Media Windows 11) installé
précédemment. Avant de commencer, reliez le lecteur à l’ordinateur, tel qu’indiqué
précédemment.
2. Vous pouvez également glisser-déposer des fichiers dans leurs dossiers respectifs.
Par exemple, glissez-déposez des fichiers de photo (jpg) dans le dossier Images,
etc.
3. Après avoir terminé de transférer tous les fichiers souhaités sur votre appareil, suivez
la procédure de “Retrait du matériel en toute sécurité” à la page 23.
REMARQUES :
• Les fichiers WMA avec DRM 10 ne peuvent pas être lus s’ils sont transférés sur une
carte mémoire micro SD. Vous devez transférer les fichiers WMA avec DRM 10 dans
la mémoire interne du lecteur pour pouvoir les lire.
• Lorsqu’une carte externe est insérée, le témoin de carte mémoire apparaît dans le
haut de l’écran.
• Pour plus de détails, veuillez consulter la page d’aide de Microsoft pour le LWM11 :
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
20
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT ET TRANSFERT DE FICHIERS (SUITE)
POUR CRÉER UNE SÉLECTION AVEC LE LECTEUR WINDOWS MEDIA 11
Suivez ces étapes pour créer une sélection à l’aide de l’option Sélection dans le
menu, en utilisant le LWM (Lecteur Windows Media) 11 :
6. Pour sauvegarder la liste, cliquez sur Enregistrer la sélection dans le bas du volet
Liste, puis tapez un nom pour la sélection.
REMARQUES :
• Pour plus de détails, veuillez consulter la page d’aide de Microsoft pour le LWM11 :
http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/player/faq/default.mspx
21
UTILISATION DE MEDIACODER
Vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel MediaCoder installé précédemment pour convertir les
fichiers MPG, MPG4, ASF, AVI et WMV en fichiers AVI pris en charge par le lecteur.
3. Spécifiez un chemin de destination pour les fichiers convertis. Dans “Output Folder”
(“Dossier de sortie”), spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les fichiers convertis seront
sauvegardés.
REMARQUE : Voir page 15 pour savoir comment transférer des fichiers sur l’appareil.
22
RETRAIT DU MATÉRIEL EN TOUTE SÉCURITÉ
DÉCONNEXION DE L’APPAREIL DE L’ORDINATEUR EN TOUTE SÉCURITÉ.
REMARQUES :
• Si l’icône “Retirer un périphérique en toute sécurité” n’est pas affichée dans la barre des
tâches, double-cliquez sur le Poste de travail. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris
sur “Memorex TouchMP” puis cliquez avec le bouton gauche sur “Éjecter”. Vous pourrez
alors déconnecter l’appareil de l’ordinateur en toute sécurité.
• Si vous utilisez Windows XP et que le Lecteur Windows Media 11 est installé, vous
n’avez pas à suivre cette procédure de “Retrait du matériel en toute sécurité”.
23
eference the Graphis MMP8590 UI for volume auto advance features.
Steps
UTILISATION GÉNÉRALE
PRISE POUR ÉCOUTEURS VOLUME ET SOURDINE
1 1 1
2
FONCTION DE VERROUILLAGE
24
UTILISATION GÉNÉRALE (SUITE)
POUR ALLUMER/ÉTEINDRE
USB CONNECTION SCREENS TOUCHE MENU
USB and DASHBOARD
1 1 MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
CONNECTING TRANSFERRING
OK TO
DO NOT DO NOT
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
RADIO VIDEO
Battery Hold/Lock
This indicates the battery status.
INSERTION/RETRAIT D’UNE CARTE MÉMOIRE EXTERNE (Micro SD - 8 Go max.)
MUSIC PHOTO
This indicates that th
100% - 76% hold status. It will di
1
Player is not in hold.
POUR ÉVITER TOUT DOMMAGE, assurez-vous
d’ÉTEINDRE 7l’appareil
5% - 51%
avant d’insérer ou de retirer la
RADIO VIDEO carte. La fente50%pour
- 26% carte mémoire micro SD est située
sous l’appareil. Ouvrez le compartiment en le glissant
SD Card
GOODBYE
vers l’extérieur
25%et- 1insérez
1% une carte mémoire micro SD
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
(non comprise) d’un maximum de 8 Go, avec le devant This indde
icates that an
inserted into the pla
NOW PLAYING la carte vers 1le0%haut,
- 0 tel qu’illustré. Pour retirer ladiscarte
sapear if the Card
25
m
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSICPHOTO PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO
3
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK
1 SETTINGS VOICE
2
AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOICE
AUDIOBOOK AUDIO
SETBTO
INOG
KS SETTINGS
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the The cycle for the menu items
Si vous n’êtes pas dans le menu
down on the icon.
menu itemprincipal,
icon. You can also change the
with hard buttons. Sélectionnez une option
hard buttons to move around
the Main Menu
icon en appuyant wsimplement
hen using the hard button
appuyez sur la touche Menu pour y sur l’écran tactile. Vous pouvez également utiliser
les touches standard :
retourner.
Touche Gauche/Haut 1 : Appuyez pour faire
défiler vers la gauche/le haut.
Touche Droite/Bas 2 : Appuyez pour faire défiler G
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
vers la droite/le bas.
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
00: 27 / 03: 25
MUSIC PHOTO
Al l Songs l’élément en surbrillance et passer au niveau
MUSIC PHOTO
d’options suivant.
ROCK SHUFFLE
TAP Ar t i st
IST NAVIGATION
Al bum
LIST SCROLLING
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
3
Genr e
MUSIC 11: 05 PM MUSIC
Pl ayl i st
11: 05 PM Lorsqu’une liste apparaît,
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
Weezer touchez la flèche
MUSIC
The Bl ue Al1b1u
: 05 PM
m MUSIC 11: 05 PM
4. Buddy Hol l y
1. iVtOeICm 8. i t em
à1. itl’écran
em
pour passer
1. i t em
d’une page70à. it el’autre. m
E AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
3. i t em 10. i t em Ta3p
. i tt e
hme Now Playing icon at the 3. i t em . i t em
ble haut
of the screavec
en and it wila touche Gauche/Haut 73. i t em 1, ou
ottom ll
4. i t em 11. i t em TAP
4. i t em 4. i t em Hold
always take you to the Music
5. i t em 12. i t em vers
N5o.wi t ePm
le bas avec5. it ela
laying Screens. m touche Droite/Bas 74. i t em 2.
6. i t em 13. i t em
Sélectionnez
6. i t em
l’élément
6. i t em
en utilisant la
7. i t em 14. i t em 7. i t em 7. i t em
3 touche Centre 3 ou en le touchant sur Hold
1 2 TAP
When in the list screen use the When in the list screen use the Evl’écran.
ery page change brings the To move rapidly through pages This will eventually take you to the
scrolling buttons on right side highlight bar up to the top. hold down the bottom scrolling final page with the highlight bar
scrolling buttons on right side
to move the page Up button over the top of item of the last pag
to move the page down
Once you reach the end of the list
It does not cycle back to the first
SUITE À LA PAGE SUIVANTE page if you push down. You are at
the end
4
MUSIC
1. My Nam e Is Jonas
2. No One El se
11: 05 PM MUSIC
1. My Nam e Is Jonas
2. No One El se
11: 05 PM MUSIC
00: 27 / 03: 25
11: 05 PM
5
ROCK SHUFFLE
3. The Wor l d Has Tur 3. The Wor l d Has Tur
7. Say It Ai n’ t So 7. Say It Ai n’ t So
In the list mode the first way to Tap directly on your selection and Your Selection will begin to play
Lorsqu’un élément d’une liste est trop long
it will take you to the next screen.
select a list item is to directly
tap on the item
TOUCHE RETOUR
et que vous souhaitez afficher le nom Pour retourner à la page précédente,
complet, appuyez sur l’élément et appuyez sur la touche de retour dans le
maintenez-le enfoncé. Lorsque vous le coin supérieur droit de l’écran.
relâcherez, le texte défilera pour afficher
l’élément au complet.
L’appareil affichera aussi le nom complet si
vous sélectionnez l’élément avec la touche
Gauche/Haut ou Droite/Bas.
6 LECTURE EN COURS
Lorsque Now Playing (lecture en cours)
apparaît dans le bas de l’écran, touchez-le
pour accéder à l’écran principal du média
que vous écoutez.
Cette fonction est disponible uniquement
pour les modes Musique, Radio et Livre
audio.
27
MENU PRINCIPAL (MAIN)
MENU PRINCIPAL (MAIN) : Appuyez sur la touche Menu pour accéder au menu
principal.
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MU S I C P H OT O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
R ADI O VI DE O
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
MU S I C P H OT O
VOI C E AUDI OB OOK S E T T I N GS
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M
N OW P L AY I N G
MU S I C P H OT O
Sélectionnez la fonction que vous souhaitez utiliser/régler.
MA I N ME N U 11: 05 P M R ADI O VI DE O
MU S I C P H OT O
N OW P L AY I N G 28
N OW P L AY I N G
EPEAT ALL VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
List Item 6 6. Sur f Wa
UTILISATION
Go to Music
Now Playing
– MODE DE
NOW P LECTURE
LAYING MUSICALE
List Item 7 7. Say It A
écran complet
Toggle Full ou
4 of 14 Retour
Back Toggle Full
REPEAT 1 Screstandard
en Album Art 00: 27 / 03: 25 (un
(one Sniveau)
tep) Screen Album Art
d’égalisation
EQ Setting Mode
Playback de lecture
Mode
Changement
Change Photo
d’illustration
d’album Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
SHUFFLE 4. Buddy Hol l y
PistePreprécédente
vious Track Avance
Forward andetPrevious Track
Retour (maintenir)
Rewind (Hold) avance rapide
Fast Forward Rewind (Hold)
Lecture/Pause (maintenir)
(hold)
Play/Pause P
Button B
POUR ÉCOUTER DES MP3/WMA
IC1
Cet appareil est compatible avec ces formats audio : Fichiers MP3, MPEG 1/2/2.5 Layer 3 avec un débit
binaire de 32-320 kbits/s et fichiers WMA ou WMA avec DRM 10 avec un débit binaire de 48-192 kbits/s.
MAIN MENU
Now Pl ayi ng
Al l Songs
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Ar t i st
TAP
Al bum
TAP VIDEO
RADIO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO
Genr e
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the The cycle for the menu items
You can use the touch screen
Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez
menu item with hsur
ard buttla
down on the icon. icon. You can also change the hard buttons to move around
ons. the Main Menu Touchez l’icône
icon MUSIC; l’écran w
tode
navigacatégorie
hen using the hard button
te through the list
musicale apparaîtra. Sélectionnez muneenu. catégorie,
touche Menu; le menu principal apparaîtra. tel qu’indiqué à l’étape 3 de la page suivante.
29 G
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE MUSICALE (SUITE)
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
MUSIC
Music Navigation THE MUSIC LIST MENUS.
Now Pl ayi ng
11: 05 PM MUSIC
Weezer
11: 05 PM MUSIC
1. My Nam e Is Jonas
11: 05 PM
30
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE MUSICALE (SUITE)
SAUT AVANT/ARRIÈRE
1 2
Pendant la lecture, touchez l’icône m (ou appuyez sur la Pendant la lecture, touchez l’icône l (ou
touche Gauche/Haut) pour retourner au début du fichier
appuyez sur la touche Droite/Bas) pour
en cours de lecture. Touchez/appuyez à plusieurs
reprises pour retourner aux fichiers précédents. accéder au début du fichier suivant.
REMARQUE : Si la lecture musicale ne démarre pas Touchez/appuyez à plusieurs reprises pour
dans les 5 secondes, appuyez à nouveau sur la touche accéder aux fichiers suivants.
Gauche/Haut pour retourner au fichier précédent.
31
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE MUSICALE (SUITE)
REMARQUES :
• Voir pages 15-21 pour plus de détails sur le transfert de fichiers MP3/WMA vers cet
appareil.
• Pendant que vous faites défiler vos fichiers musicaux, vous pouvez toucher l’icône
Retour pour retourner au menu précédent.
• Vous pouvez suspendre la lecture en mode de Lecture musicale en touchant l’icône
p ou en appuyant sur la touche Centre. Touchez l’icône ® ou appuyez sur la touche
Centre pour reprendre la lecture.
• Réglez le mode de Lecture sur Normal, Repeat One (répétition simple), Repeat All
(répétition toutes) ou Shuffle (aléatoire), tel qu’indiqué à la page suivante.
• Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas et Centre au
lieu des icônes m, l et ®, respectivement, pour naviguer et sélectionner les
éléments indiqués dans les deux pages précédentes.
• Réglez le volume de la façon indiquée à la page 24.
ÉGALISEUR (EQ)
32
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE MUSICALE (SUITE)
MODES DE LECTURE
1
MUSIC
TOGGLE ALBUM ART
MUSIC
4 of 14
00: 27 / 03: 25
11: 05 PM MUSIC
SÉLECTION/CHANGEMENT
CHANGE ALBUM ART
D’ILLUSTRATION D’ALBUM
1 MUSIC
4 of 14
00: 27 / 03: 25
11: 05 PM MUSIC
4 of 14
00: 27 / 03: 25
11: 05 PM
Def aul t
11: 05 PM SELECT ALBUM ART
Bear br i ck phot os 02
TAP
The album art can be changed The album art can be changed The photo select list displays either
À partir de l’écran de Lecture musicale,
by tapping on the album art box. by tapping on the album art box. Touchez Default pourhInatrhdutiliser
e photo list youl’icône
default - which shows album art or can use the par
buttons to navigate the list
When a phot
art changes
If there is no album art, then My Photo - which allows you to
touchez l’icône d’illustration d’album; la “Select Photo” is displayed. défaut ou My Photo pour
pick a photo. as wellsélectionner
. l’une
sélection d’illustration d’album apparaîtra. de vos photos. La photo sélectionnée
apparaîtra comme illustration d’album pour
toutes les chansons.
33
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE MUSICALE (SUITE)
een to bring the
back to toggle
You can still use the hard buttons
to change the music as shown
Now Playing Screen in the General Play Functions
gam e 01.j pg
MUSIC
4 of 14
11: 05 PM MUSIC
4 of 14
11: 05 PM
sélectionner l’illustration d’album complète
1.j pg
00: 27 / 03: 25 00: 27 / 03: 25
TAP
SHUFFLE
k phot os 02
TAP
list you can use the When a photo is chosen, the album
to navigate the list art changes to the photo
34
. j pg 24 / 234 11: 05 PM
Go to Music NOW PLAYING List Item 7 Bear
Now Playing
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE DE PHOTO
Photo Screen
ÉCRAN DE PHOTO PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO
Retour
TBasculement
oggle Landscadu
pe Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
Backniveau)
(un Thumnail
Mmode
ode paysage (one Step) selection box
y/Pause
deshow
ton
Next
Picture
Back
(one Step)
Image Image
Prprécédente
evious Picture Nexsuivante
t Picture
PTouche
lay/PausLecture/
e Slideshow
BPause/Diaporama
utton
OT O POUR AFFICHER DES PHOTOS – Cet appareil est compatible avec les fichiers JPEG de base.
MAIN MENU
PHOTO
MAIN MENU SELECTION PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
111: 0
15: 0P5MPM
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSICMUSIC PHOTOPHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
Kubr i ck phot os 03
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 01
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
RADIORADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
Fabr i ck phot os 02
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the PTu
hsehctyhceleTfhour m
thbenm
aiel nicuon
iteom
ns
Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez
down on the icon.
menu item with hasur
rd buttola
icon. You can also change the
ns. Touchez l’icône PHOTO; twwhl’écran
hard buttons to move around
the Main Menu
icon heerniguhstin dade
sigdethaenh
ill go to Thumnail Mode
trhdebliusttton
MUSIC PHOTO
Al l Songs 35 MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE DE PHOTO (SUITE) * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS. PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU
3b
11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
11: 05 PM PHOTO 1O
PH 1:T0O5 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
MUSIC PHOTO
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01 VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS Bear br i ck phot os 01
Bear buddy.j pg
PHOTO
pour afficher les icônes à nouveau.
Bear buddy.j pg
11: 05 PM PHOTO
PHOTO
11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg
11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO
Si ck Bi k e.j pg
11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO
Bear buddy.j pg
11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j pg
PHOTO
Si ck Bi k
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 234 24 / 234
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 2
MAIN MENU
4 11: 05 PM PHOTO
Kubr i ck phot os 01
Kur br i ck phot os 02
11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
5
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
TAP
The thumbnail screen functions Once you select a photo, it will You can use the back button or
Push the Thumbnail icon on In thumnail mode use the same
À partir de la vue Miniature, appuyez sur the right side and the list
will go to Thumnail Mode
in the same way that the list
screen navigation works. Tap on Pendant le visionnement
selection screen. Hit the back button to de
take you to the photo viewing
tap method to make your
List mla
enu aftephoto
r the image in
the Photo View will go to the
l’icône Liste pour afficher la liste à nouveau. the scroll buttons to change page
sélectionnée, touchez l’icône Retour pour
return to the thumbnail view page. the list finishes playback.
You can navigate using the touch
screen or the the hard buttons
to move up and down
retourner à la vue des miniatures.
36
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE DE PHOTO (SUITE)
AFFICHER UN DIAPORAMA
MAIN MENU SELECTION
MENU
MAINPHOTO * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING * NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST
PHOTO
PHOTO NAVIGATION
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NTA HVEIG
PAHTOINGLIST MENUS.
TO
PHOTO NAVIGATION THE PHOTO LIST MENUS.
OTO NAVIGATION
1 2
THE MPAH
IN O
METO LIST ME1N1:0U5 PSM.
NU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU PHOTO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM
Kur br i ck pPhHo
OTtOos 02
24 / 234
Kur br i ckMUpSIhC ot os 02PHOTO
Kur br i ck phoHtoolsdMU0S2
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
IC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
3 4
MAIN MENU PHOTO 11: 05 PM 11:05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM MAIN MENUPHOTO 11: 05 PM 11:05 PM PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO 11: 05 PM11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM PHOTO PHOTO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
Bear buddy.j p4gof 14 Si ck Bi k e.j pg
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234 Now Pl ayi ng Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 234
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
Bear buddy.j pg
24 / 234
Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Bear buddy.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy0.0j p: 2g7 / 03: 25
24 / 234 24 / 234 24 / 234 25 / 234 24 / 234
Al l Songs
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
TAP Ar t i st
Al bum
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
Genr e
Weezer
The Bl ue Al bum
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
Pl ayl i st VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 4. Buddy Hol l y
37
You can navigate using the touch
screen or the the hard buttons
LAY FUNCTIONS
5 6
11: 05 P
1M1: 05 PM PHOP
TH
OOTO 11: 0151P: 0M5 PM PHP
OHTOTO 11:1015: 0P5MPM PHOTO 11: 05 PM PHOTO 11: 05 PM
bB
ueda
dry.bj pugddy.j pg Bear S
biucdkdByi.kj peg.j pg Bea
Breb
arudbduyd.d
j pyg.j pg Si ck Bi k e.j pg Bear buddy.j pg
/ 2234 / 234 24 /25 23/4 234 24 2/4 2/34234 25 / 234 24 / 234
odnreinvethrseecbeuntteorn Push the same button to The forward and reverse button
Pruesshum
the trh
eveesrlsideebsuhtotw
on to go allows you to manually change the PusThhteheporepvu erpsedibssuatp toenartsoagftoer The pop up dissapears after
midaensuhaollw
Pendant le diaporama ou le visionnement
y .chPaunsh ge the
epxat uosreptrheevisohuosw
im
The image will change every
. age back to the previous image.
3 seconds in slideshow
photo to the next or previous image
again.
Pendant le diaporama ou le again.
visionnement
1 sec. until the screen is tapped
bac1k stoect.huenptirletvhieouscsriemeangies .tapped
d’une photo, touchez l’icône m ou l pour d’une photo, touchez l’icône Paysage pour
accéder à la photo précédente ou suivante. faire alterner l’affichage entre les modes
paysage et portrait.
REMARQUES :
• Voir pages 15-21 pour plus de détails sur le transfert de fichiers de photo vers cet
appareil.
• Pendant que vous faites défiler vos photos, vous pouvez toucher l’icône Retour pour
retourner au menu précédent.
• Vous pouvez écouter de la musique, la radio ou un livre audio pendant que vous
visionnez des images. Démarrez simplement la lecture musicale, la radio ou le livre
audio, puis accédez au mode Photo.
• Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas et Centre au lieu
des icônes m, l et ®, respectivement, pour naviguer et sélectionner les éléments
indiqués dans la section d’utilisation du mode Photo.
38
Scroll down
G List Item 7 Epi sode 18 (hold to make
Now Playing
ÉCRAN VIDÉO VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Touche Lecture/
Play/Pause
Pause/
Slideshow
Diaporama
Button
Vidéo
Preprécédente
vious Video Vidéo
Nexsuivante
t Video
Retour
Rew(maintenir)
ind(hold) Avance
Fast Frapide
orward
(maintenir)
(hold) RetourBack
(un
(onniveau)
e Step)
POUR VISIONNER DES VIDÉOS
Cet appareil est compatible avec ces formats vidéo : AVI-MPEG4 : Simple Profile (résolution 320x240, 20-
24 images/s, 385 kbits/s); WMV : VC-1 Simple Profile (résolution 320x240, 20-24 images/s, 385 kbits/s max.)
VIDEO
MAIN MENU
2 MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU
VIDEO
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r e
PLAY FUNCTION POP UP GO
39 Ref er ence.
3 4
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM VIDEO 11: 05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
While the pop up is up, press the You can use the back button or
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or the Now Playing will go to the
Faites défiler la liste et touchez le nom de la Vous pouvez suspendre la vidéo
the Video list menu. use the hard buttons to navigate
and select
menu. Now the sen
back button to return to the list
creen will d List menu after the last video inThe play button controls the
the pause icon. The v the list finishes playback. playback of the video. Press
vidéo souhaitée pourSelela ct visionner; la lecture touchant l’icônethispbuttou
on to pen appuyant
ause th e video. plasur
yback isla
stopped.
REMARQUES :
• Les vidéos seront lues uniquement au format paysage.
• Voir pages 15-21 pour plus de détails sur le transfert de fichiers vidéo vers
TAP
Hold cet appareil.
TAP
Hold
TAP
2sec 2sec
• Pendant que vous faites défiler vos vidéos, vous pouvez toucher l’icône Retour pour
The playretourner
button controls the au menu
Now the screeprécédent.
n will display The forward button skips The back button skip back plays I f yo u ho l d th e fo r wa rd If you hold the Reverse
playback of the video. Press the pause icon. The video the video ahead to the next the previous video. button down, it will button down, it will
this•buttVous
on to pause pouvez
the video. également
p layback is stopped. utiliserVideles
o. touches Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas fast forward theet track.Centre Rau ewindlieu
the track.
40
UTILISATION – MODE DE LECTURE VIDÉO (SUITE)
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on
r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on PLAY FUNCTION POP UP Ref er ence.
SAUT AVANT/ARRIÈRE
VIDEO
2
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12 VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Ent our age 12
Ent our age 14 TAP Ent our age 14 Hold Hold TAP TAP
TAP TAP 2sec 2sec
Ent our age 15 Ent our age 15
retourner auWhidébut
MAIN MENU
1
TAP
VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO
Pendant la lecture, maintenez enfoncée
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
Select the Video Icon to enter You can use the touchscreen or
l’icône m ou l (ou maintenez enfoncée la
back button to return to the list the Now Playing will go to the
the Video list menu. use the hard buttons to navigate List menu after the last video in
menu.
and select the list finishes playback.
Select touche Gauche/Haut 1 ou Droite/Bas 2)
pour faire avancer ou revenir la lecture
dans une vidéo afin de repérer une scène
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o Now Pl ayi ng Musi c Scr een f or but t on Hold Hold
PLAY FUNCTION POP UP TAP TAP 2sec
Ref er ence.
spécifique. Le lecteur se déplacera vers 2sec
Now the screen will display The forward button skips The back button skip back plays If yol’avant
u hold the forwardou l’arrière
If you hold the à
Revershaute
e vitesse aussi
VIDEO
the paEunt osuer ageic/ soeasnon.3 Tepihsodee 1v7 1i1d:05ePo
M VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
the video ahead to the next the previous video. VIDEO
button down, it will
Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM
button down, it will VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11: 05 PM VIDEO Ent our age / season 3 epi sode 17 11:05 PM
Balayage
Auto Scan
Retour
Back
SCAN
automatique (un
(oneniveau)
Step)
102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
6 stations
6 Preset Stations
préréglées P1 P2 P3
P4 P5 P6
O1
POUR ÉCOUTER LA RADIO FM
RADIO
MAIN MENU
SCAN
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
MUSIC
Hold
PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
MUSIC
MUSIC
PHOTO
PHOTO 102.7
MUSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz PHOTO
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng
P1 P2 P3
RADIO VIDEO
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
TAP
P4 P5 P6
NOW PLAYING
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING
TAP
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the The cycle for the menu items
Tap the radio icon to activate the
Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez
down on the icon.
menu item with hasur
rd buttola
icon. You can also change the
ns. Touchez
hard buttons to move around
the Main Menu radio. l’icône RADIO;
icon
radio fl’écran
Tap towm
deoucatttoena
heannuuaslilnygtuthnee haanrddlb
requency
TUNING GO
RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MUSIC 11: 05 PM
42
SCAN 4 of 14 SCAN
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
3 4110022.6.6
AR ADIO 11: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO :1015: 0P5MPM RAR
DA DIO 11:1015: 0P5MPM
M MAIN MENU
OAIN MENU 11: 051P:1015: 0P5MPM
1M RD
RA IDOIO 111:10:505PM RADIO IO 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM11: 05 PM RADIORADIO 11: 05 1P1M IO
FM1
M F F F FM1
M1
1 F F
SAS
CNAC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCS
AC
NAN SCAN SCS
AC
NAN
SC SCAN SCAN SCANSCAN
102.7
MUM
SUICSIC
Ki ss FM
m hz
PHP
OHTO
OTO
111000222..67
KiK
.7
ssi sF
sM FM
mm
m hz
hzhz 10211.06022.6
.6 m hz m hmzhz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz m hmzhz 1011200.272.7
.7 Ki ss FM
Ki ssKFi sMs FM
m hz
m hz m hz 110022.7
.7
KiKssi sF
sM FM
m hmzhz
TA
TAPP RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
P4 P5 P6 P4 P4P5 P5 P5P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
P4 P5 P6 P4P4 P5P5 P6P6 P4 P4 P4 P5 P6
VOV
ICOEICE AUA
DU DBIO
IO OB
OOKOK SES
TE
TITNTG
IN
SGS SCAN SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
A
SCAN
NN
OOWWPP
LLAA
YY
ININ
GG
102.7 Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7Ki ss FM
m hz 102.7
Ki ss FM
m hz
TAP
l’icône m ou l. Touchez-le à nouveau ou appuyez sur l’une
REMARQUE : Consultez la section ci- des touches Volume pour rétablir le son.
TUUNNINdessous
INGG pour
accomplishutiliser
ed by tap and hold onle maticBalayage
Assigning preset manually can be The current station will be auto- After the preset stations have
ally stored in the selected en set simply tap on them to TT
TO MAcbheIaN MENU
The selection will be highlighted
OOaM
nM
d tA
M1
eIN
AhIN staM
MtiEoEnNN
wiU
Ull change. FM M1M1 FMFM
automatique.
the available slot slot. nge the station.
RADIO
DIORADIO 11M:1015: 0P5MPM
11: 05 P RADIR
RADIO
OADIO
1015: 0P5MPM
11: 0511P:M RADIO RAR
DA DIO
IO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM RAR
RADIO DA DIO
IO :1015: 0P5MPM
11: 051P1M RAR
DA DIO
IO 11:1015: 0P5MPM MAM
INAIM
NEM
NEUNU 11:1015: 0P5MPM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
1011100.212.7
.7 m hz
m hz m hz
Ki ss FM
K- EaKritshs FM
010
11 101
.1 .1
1.1 K-aErat h
K- EKa-rE
th
r th
m hz
m hzm hz 11.07
102 011.1
Ki ss FM
.1 m hz
K-KE-aErat h r th
m hmzhz 1011200.272.7
.7 Ki ss FM
Ki ssKFi sMs FM
m hz
m hz m hz
TAP
MUSIC 110022.7
.7
KiKssi sF
sM
PHOTO m hmzhz
FM TATPAP
MUM
SUICSIC PHP
OHTO
OTO
RiR
BALAYAGE AUTOMATIQUE
ckei cm
REMARQUES :
k eDeeseisnitnhtehM
D eo
Mronri n
nigng eTtm
em pt at i ons Tem pt at i ons iR
cekiecD
k DeesnitnhtehM e Mor ni ng RiR
cki cD
k eDeeseisnitnhtehM
eoMronri n
nigng
T pt at i ons TemTp atpitoantsi ons Ri ck Dees i n tTheemMpot ar tniionngs Ri ckRD s ei nest hi e Mor nionrgni ng
1
RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM RADIO 11: 05 PM
P4 P4 P4 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P4 P5
SCAN
P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P4 P4 P4 P5
SCAN
P5 P5P6
menu précédent.
P6 P6 P4 P4 P4
SCAN
P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6
VOICE
P4 P4
SCAN
AUDIOBOOK
P5 P5
SETTINGS
P6 P6
VOV
ICOEICE AUA
DU DBIO
IO OB
OOKOK SES
TE
TITNTG
IN
SGS
HHolodld
2s2escec
TAP Hold
Ki ss FM
Ri ck Dees i n t he Mor ni ng HH olodld
2s e c TAP
Gauche/Haut,
Kost
Sl ow j am s TAP Droite/Bas et Centre au lieu KBi g
Sof t Rock
TATPAP
2sec 2sec OR
odldtotoau autoto
mm ataitciaclalyllytutu
nne ean
an dd Hold to automatically tune and TheHcH
P1
oo
enldtldetorto
P2
atu
bauu ttotoo
nm
m aMtaiutciatcelalsylltythuteu
P3
nne eanan dd TaTph Tth
P1
eheececbn tdes
eancetkreirbcb
P2
uou nicônes
tnttotto
o ng
P3
MoM
ubu eoe m,TaTl
teatsecskthtth apthth
p eet
ebbacakc®,
P1
nntotrespectivement,
kicioco ogg
oobb
P2
acakcktoto P3
pour P1 P2 P3
actaetethth
e ennexetxtstsrtoro
nn gg esetstrard
adioio locate the next strongest radio radiloolo
cactaetethth e enn exetxtstsrtoro nn gg esetstrard ad ioio therarm
ad iaoiion screen. thth
e emmaianinscsrcereenen..
naviguer et sélectionner les éléments
d
eq
q uu enencyc.y. frequency. P4 frferq
eq uu en encyc.y.
P5 P6 P4 P5 P6 P4 P5 P6 P4 P5 P6
1 RADIO RADIO
SCAN SC
SA
CNAN
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO
SCAN SCAN
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
2
RADIO RADIO
A A
SCAN SCAN
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO
SCAN A
SCAN SCAN
SCAN
AN
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO
A A
SCAN SCAN
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10120.7
2.7
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz m hz 10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz
Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Ri ck DRei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7 99.1 99.1 101.1 101.1 102.7 102.7
D D
HOL HcOL c
2 Se2 Se
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9 103.5 103.5 104.3 104.3 105.9 105.9
TAP TAP
AssiA
gsnsiinggnp
inrgespertem
seatnm
uan
llyuaclalyn cbaen be TheTchuerrceunrtrestnattisotantw
ioinll w
beillabuetoa-uto-AfteAr fttheer tphrespertessteattisotantsiohnasvehave TheTsheelescetilo
ecntw
ioinll w
beillhbigehhlighltiegdhted
Sélectionnezaccoam ccpolmishune
pelidshbeydtb apy taanpdstation
the tahveaialavbalielasblloet slot
ahnodldhon
ld on matm icaltliycradio,
slot.slot.
astlloyrsetdorinedthine tsheelesctel
eteledcted beePour
n y tpaaccéder
besent ssiemt psilm
chanch
gaentg
àatnhde tsun
thteom to and
lpy toanptohnem
he tshtaetisotant.ion.
ioinpréréglage,
htaetisotantw ll w
chilal nch
gaen
. ge. touchez
qu’indiqué à la page précédente. simplement l’icône de préréglage afin de le
Maintenez enfoncée l’une des icônes de syntoniser automatiquement.
préréglage et la station sera mémorisée sur
le préréglageAUsélectionné.
ATU OTSOCSACNAM NOMDOEDE
RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM RADIO RADIO 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
10120.7
2.7 m hz
Ki ss FKMi ss FM
m hz 10130.5
3.5
Kost Kost
m hz m hz 10140.3
4.3 KBi g KBi g
m hz m hz 10180.0
8.0 m hz m hz
TARPi cT
kA
DRP
ei ceks D
i netehsei n
MtohreniM
ng
or ni ng Sl ow jSalm
ows j am s TAP TAP
Sof t RSoocfkt Rock
OROR
P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3 P1 P1 P2 P2 P3 P3
P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6 P4 P4 P5 P5 P6 P6
44
List Item 5 08/ 19
Record Icon
RecoTouche
Retour
rd button Back
(un niveau)
Enregistrer/Stop 00: 27 / 03: 25 (one Step)
Icône Corbeille
Trash Icon Go to Liau
st Mmenu
enu de liste
Accès
Suppression de
Delfichiers
ete Files
00:/300:00
00:00 1
08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM
Piste Piste
Previous Track Nextsuivante
Track
précédente
Rewin(maintenir)
Retour d (hold) Avance
Fast Forwrapide
ard (Ho(maintenir)
ld)
Touche
Play/PLecture/Pause
ause Button
Select L
EC ORD
POUR ENREGISTRER/ÉCOUTER DES ENREGISTREMENTS
MAIN MENU
RECORD
TO RECORD
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM
11: 05 PM
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
TAP
RADIO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO RADIO RADIO RADIO VIDEO VIDEO RADIO VIDEO
VIDEO
00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS 1E
2: 45 PM AUDIOBOOK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOIC SETTINGS
TAP NOWNP
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING OLW
AYPILNAGYING NOW PLAYING
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the Whe
Tap Tthheismaicctiio
connwtoillahcitgivhaltiegh
thtethe Tap thTehe
reccyocrdleicfo
orntthoestm
aretnvuoiicteemdsot
down on the icon. icon. You can also change the hard buttons to move around
Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez
menu item with hsur
ard buttla
ons. the Main Menu Touchezvoil’icône
cieco
rencording.
VOICE;recorl’écran
win
d
de
hge.n using the hard buttonyou
4 of 14
11: 05 PM 00: 27 / 03: 25
Now Pl ayi ng
00: 27 / 03: 25
UTILISATION – MODE D’ENREGISTREUR VOCAL (SUITE)
3 4
Touchez l’icône Enregistrer (q) pour Une fois l’enregistrement terminé, touchez
démarrer l’enregistrement. Parlez dans le l’icône Stop ( X ).
micro (situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de
l’appareil) et l’appareil enregistrera la voix.
5 VOICE
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM VOICE
6
VOICE
VOICE
12: 45 PM
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM
VOICE
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TA
: 2P8PM TA
00: 31 / 02: 29 TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12
TAP 08/ 19/ 2008 120:02:83P
1M/ 02: 29 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 2P8PM
00: 31 / 02: 29
08/ 19/ 2008 0088
/ 1/91/ 2 08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 90/028008 12: 45PM
12: 45 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45P
12:M
15 PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
You can navigate the screen using You can navigate the screen using
Tap the list icon to view all the touch screen Tap the lisSteilceocnt otothveier w
recaollrded messages Tap the back screen to go backSteolect other recorded messages
Touchez l’icône rListe
ecorded messpour
ages. afficher
You can usla
e the lliste
eft or right recFaites
orded fm sstahgeesli.st. défiler
roem
You can tuhla
see pthreevlieofut soliste
the touch screen
srcrriegehnt . etfrom the touchez
list.
Tap
the
button to navigate the screen.
de l’enregistreur vocal.
button to navigate the screen.
l’enregistrement souhaité; la lecture de
l’enregistrement sélectionné démarrera
automatiquement.
NEW RECORDING NEWRREETC
UORR
NDTIO
NGMAIN SCREEN RETURN TO MAIN SCREEN
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
46 RADIO VIDEO
7 8
47
UTILISATION – MODE D’ENREGISTREUR VOCAL (SUITE)
POUR SUPPRIMER UN ENREGISTREMENT
RECORD
DELETE RECORDING
1 VOICE
00: 27 / 03: 25
12: 45 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
2 12: 45 PM
DELETE?
08/ 19/ 2008
12: 45 PM
11: 05 PM VOICE 12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 15PM TAP
NO YES YES
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 22PM
TAP
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 28PM
TAP 00: 31
08/ 19/ 2008
TAP
12: 45 PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 45PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM
08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM 08/ 19/ 2008 12: 57PM OK 08/ 19/ 2008 01: 25PM
TAP
This will bring you to a delete Once the action is completed it
Tap the trash icon to delete a
À partir durecordingmode
. d’Enregistreur
buttons or the touch screvocal,
screen. Using either the hard
en Sélectionnezusing theun
touch screenenregistrement
or hard à
will take you back to the delete
REMARQUES :
• Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas et Centre au lieu
des icônes m, l et ®, respectivement, pour naviguer et sélectionner les éléments
indiqués dans la section d’utilisation du mode d’Enregistreur vocal.
• Réglez le volume de la façon indiquée à la page 24.
48
UTILISATION – MODE DE LIVRE AUDIO
ÉCRAN DE LIVRE AUDIO
Basculement de
la couverture de Retour
livre complète (un niveau)
AUDIOBOOK
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r
NAVIGATING AUDIOBOOK MENU THE AUDIOBOOK
Hold
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC MUSIC PHOTO PHOTO SIC PHOTO
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE VOAIC
UE
DIOBOOKAUDIO
SB
ET
OTOIK
NGS SETTINGS Nor wegViOaICnE WoAoUd
DIOBOOK SETTINGS
NOW N
PO APYI NG
LTA
NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING NOW PLAYING W PLAYING Nor wegi an WN
oOodW PLAYI NG
TAP
When making a selection, hold This action will highlight the You can continue to use the This action will highlight the NavigaTtheetchyrocluegfhorthth
e elism
tbeny u items S
hard buttons to move around Tap theicaoun
diobook icon to
Une fois l’appareil allumé, appuyez
menu item with hsur
ard buttla Touchez l’icône AUDIOBOOK;
down on the icon. icon. You can also change the tappinwghoennsucsreinegn tohreuhsianrgd tbhuetton t
ons. the Main Menu activate the audiobook mode left or right hard buttons
Now Pl ayi ng
11: 05 PM
49 MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM MUSIC
4 of 14
11: 05 PM
3 4
Faites défiler la liste et touchez le nom du Vous pouvez suspendre le livre en touchant
livre audio souhaité; le livre audio s’ouvrira l’icône p ou en appuyant sur la touche
automatiquement et la lecture démarrera. Centre. Touchez l’icône ® ou appuyez sur
la touche Centre pour reprendre la lecture
du livre audio.
5 6
Touchez l’icône m ou l pour accéder au Touchez l’icône > ou < pour accéder au titre
chapitre précédent ou suivant. Un écran précédent ou suivant.
contextuel apparaîtra pour confirmer le
changement de chapitres. Sélectionnez YES
pour accéder au chapitre suivant, ou NO pour
reprendre à partir de la position précédente.
50
UTILISATION – MODE DE LIVRE AUDIO (SUITE)
REMARQUES :
• L’appareil sauvegarde la dernière position de lecture de chaque livre. Il peut ainsi
reprendre la lecture à partir de la dernière position de chaque livre.
• Voir pages 15-21 pour plus de détails sur le transfert de fichiers de livre audio vers cet
appareil.
• Vous pouvez toucher l’icône Retour pour retourner au menu précédent.
• Vous pouvez suspendre la lecture en touchant l’icône p ou en appuyant sur la touche
Centre. Touchez l’icône ® ou appuyez sur la touche Centre pour reprendre la lecture.
• Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas et Centre au lieu
des icônes m, l et ®, respectivement, pour naviguer et sélectionner les éléments
indiqués dans les deux pages précédentes.
• Réglez le son de la façon indiquée à la page 24.
51
MENU DES RÉGLAGES
POUR ACCÉDER AU MENU DE RÉGLAGES
SETTINGS
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease
MAIN MENU SELECTION MAIN MENU SET TINGS NAVIGATION THE SETTINGS L
NAVIGATION
11: 05 PM
1 SETTINGS
MAIN MENU
* NOTE! ! : Pl ease r ef er t o LIST NAVIGATION ON NAVIGATING
THE SETTINGS LIST MENUS.
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
SETTINGS
2
11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENM
U AIN MENU 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM MAIN MENU
SETTINGS
BRIGHTNESS
BACKLIGHT
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
MUSIC PHOTO
touche Menu;
the touch screen
Yo u le
c a n
You can use the left or right n avmenu
the touch screen
i g a te t h e s c re e nprincipal
you to the list.
u s i n g Pu s h t h e back bapparaîtra.
you to the list.
utton to return des Réglages apparaîtra.
button to navigaYtoeutchaensucsreetehne. left or right
button to navigate the screen.
BRIGHTNESS
G
GESSSNSNAAPOUR RÉGLER LA LUMINOSITÉ *NOO
TTEE! !!:! :PPl el e
aa ser er e
f ef e
r rt ot oLL
ISIS
TTNN
AAVVIG
AA TTIO
NNOO
NNNN
AAVV IG
AATTININ
GG
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
*N se IG IO IG
BVRIG
V IIG ATTTIO
GAH IOENN
N SS TT
HH
MAIN MENU
EESSEETT TT INI1NG G
S
1: 05SPML I ST MENUS.
LIST MENUS. MUSIC 11: 05 PM
MAIN MENU 11: 05 PM BRIGHTMN
USIE
C SS 11: 05 PM
BRIGHTNESS
1 2
4 of 14
N1o1:w
05 PP
M la yi ng
111: 011
5: 01P
: 05
5M EPTM
PSM TINGS 11: 05SP
EMTTIN
SGES
TTINGS
SETTINGS
1E1T: 0
S TI5NP
1M
G1: 05 PM
S
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SESTETSTIE
NTTSINGS
TIG
NGS SETTINGS 111: 0
15: 0P
5MPM 11: 05 PM SETS
TEIN
TGTISNGSSETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 0151:P0M
11: 05 PM
511P:0M5 PM SETST
EITN
TIG
NSGS BA1C
1:10:K
1 50PLIGHT
5MPM SETTINS
00: 27 / 03: 25
GESTTI NGS 11:05 PM 11: 05 PM
S BRIGHTNESS
BB
RR IG
IGHH
BTRT
NNEHE
SSSESSS IBGIRH NSEA lSlIGS
HToNn gSs BB
RR IG
IGHHTBT
NRN
EESHS
S SREIGSHSTNESS 6 1
IG TN BRIGHTNESS BB
RR GIH
GN
T HN
T TS
EE SR
B
S ES IG TBN BBRRIIG
GH
HT
TNNEESSSS
POWER SAVINGS
BRIGHB
TN
REIG
SS
HTNESS
MUSIC PHOTO MUSIC PHOTO
ROCK SHUFFLE
BACKLIGHT 5
BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT BB
AACC
KKLLIG
IG
HHTT
5 2
PHOTO 6 1
T6AP 1
66 6 11 1
Ar6t i st 1
6
6
1
1 6
6
1
SE1 T TIME
6 1
6 1
PHOTO
POWER SAVINGS TA
TAPP
INGS PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAVVIN
INGGSS 5 5 2 5 Al bu6m 2 PP
OOWW
EERRSS
AAV5VIN
INGGS6S 2 5 5 2 5 2 2
3 3
SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3
Ge3 nr e 3 SS
EETTTTIM
IMEE 3 3 3 3 3 3
VIDEO LANGUAGE
VIDEO
3 3 33 3 33 3 3 3 3 DE
3 FAULT Weezer 3 3
TAP The Bl ue Al bum
DEFAULT LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE Pl ayl i st LLAA
NNGG
UUAA
GGEE 4. Buddy Hol l y
TA
FORMATP OK
VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS VOICE AUDIOBOOK SETTINGS
AUDIOBOOK
DIOBOOK
SETTINGS
FORMAT
SETTINGS DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT NOW PLAYING
OK OK DD
EEFF
AAUULT
LT OK NOW PLAYING OK OK
You can use the Hard Buttons
P
OO
WWPPLLAA
YY ITNG KO
KK
TA
ITN G FF
OORR
MM TTOK
AA OO FFOO
RRMM AA TT OK
TAP
You can also chO anKge the setting toOcKycle through the Brightness
AAPP
You can use the Hard Buttons
to cycle through the Brightness You can also cT ha an pgtehteheNsoew ttinPglayinbgy idciorenctalyt p
threessing on the level settings of which there are 6
TAP
YYooYuouu ccaacnn unsnaevativh eataH by touching thbeoatrtro mTsAPoonf tthhee scrYeoeuncaanndailtsowcilhl ange the setting
an gig e atttrhtidnhegeBssucsortcfetro
stee eenen
w hsn
ichutshin
using erge arPeu6sh the back button to return
Push the back button to return ow levels.
ttohtcheyetcotlo chrsocsurcegreehenletnh
euucth
h veelsB. rightness youutotoththeelislits.t. You canboatltsoomcohfatnhgeaeslcw
trheaeeynssO
ettRatiknegyou tboytd hiereM ctulysipc ressing on the level
yo TAP
Accédez au menu Settings (réglages), telsYeoYtotuiu
ncgacsn an oufuswesehthitcheheletlhefteftoreor rrairrgiegh6ht t
lebvbueutlttsot.onntotonnavaivgigataeteththeescsrcereeenn. .
by touching the arrN
bottom of the screen OR
ow ow
Touchez le niveau de luminosité souhaité
s oPnlatyhieng Screens.
générale de l’afficheur.
11: 05 PM SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
E
SSSS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS BIRGIH
GT
HNTE
NSES
SS
BR BR BR BR BR
H
TT
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1
A
VV IN
INGGSS
5
55 2 5
66 2 5
66 2 5
55 2 5
22 2
52
5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
E
MENU DES RÉGLAGES (SUITE)
T
RÉGLAGE DU RÉTROÉCLAIRAGE
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
HT BABCAKCLKILGIH
11: 05 PM GTH T SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
1 2
BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT BACKLIGHT
SET SETT SIG
NGS 11:10151: 0
1:M
P505 PM TSEET TINGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M SESTETTSIT
ET TINGS 0:5101
111:1 P: 05 PM
5M
SETT INGS 11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M5 PM SETTSSIE
ET TINGS 5111
11: 01 P::0
05 PM
M SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
11: 05 PM STEITNTG
IN S PM SETS IN
TGTS
INGS 5 PM NIG
NSGS PM SETT
SIENTG
TS
INGS NTGTSINGS 5 PM
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC GLHITGHT BKALCIK
BAC G
ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF ALWAYB
S ACKLFIGHT
OF
ON ON ON ON ON
INGS BABCAKC
LKIG
LH
IG
THT
HT 15 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 ALWAYS 3 3
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
15 3 15 15 15 15 3
LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF ALAWAYLS
WAYS seO FF LS
sec ALWAALY WAYSOFF O FF sec ALWA LS
ALY WAYSOFF O FF LS
ALWAY WAYSO
sec OsFeFc OsFeFc sec AYS OFOF FFc OsFeFc eANcYS OsFeFc
H
SATVINGS
11: 05 PM
BABCPAKOPC
LOKIEW
W
SETTINGS
ISRGATSsVH
GRLEH ec
A
INV
ALWAYS
TGINSGS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
OO
LW
N
ON
NON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON O
WN
ON
AYS
ON
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
ON sO
W
O
N
11: 05 PM
ON ON
10 5 10
1s5ec 1
se5c 3 15 1155
sec
1L5W
A 15c5YS 3 33
seA
10
1515 15AA
sec
LW L5Y
LAW
A W
seA
SAYS3 3 3
c YS
10
15 1155ALW
sec ALW
AALY
W5
ScAYYSS3 33
seA
10
15 1155ALW
sec
AA LY
W5
SAYS3 33
s3
ec
15 15 3
S sec sec
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sseecc
secON sec sec sseecc sescecsec
OO
NN ON sescecsec sec sseecc
ONO ONN sec sseecc sec sseecc
ON ON sec sseecc
BACKLIGsHeTc11:05 P1M1:05 PM
sec sec
secs
E 11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
SET
ST
TIEME
SG
EITNTIEN
STG
TS
INGS 11: 05 PM SETSINTSG
TE TES
BACKLIGH
ITNTGIN
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM NS
SESTETTIT ES
IG
NGTS
BACKLIGH
TINGS
T P1M
111:10:505 1:M
P 05 PM SETS SG
TIENTTES
ITNTG
IN
BACKLIGH
SGS
T11:05 P1M1:05 PM
11: 05 PM SIENS
SETT E
TSITNTG
TG IN
SGS 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
10 5 10 1100 5 55 1010 10 55 5 10 1100 5 55
TAP 10 1100 5 55 10 10
ESS LALNAGNU GAUG
BAAG
E E
sec sec
BAB
CA
sec sseecc
KBC
LAK
IC
GLK LTIHGTHT
HIG
sec sseecc
BB
AACC
sescecsec
KBK
LAL
IC
G KLTITGHT
HH
sescecsec
BAB
CAKBC
LAK
IC
GLK
s
sec secec sec sseecc
LTIHGTHT
HIG BAC
BK
sec sec sec sseecc
BL
AIKC
s
GLK
e c
HILG
TIH
GTHT
sec sec
BACKBLAIC
GK
H
s
GE ALWAYS
CK LIGHT
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
IG
OFF ALWAYS OFF ALWAYS
A C
OFF
TAPTAP
ON ON ON ON ON
HN
TGS BACBKALCIKGL
HITGH T TAP
DED
FEA15F TL1O
UALU T5K 3 AALYW
15 ALW ASLAA
WY
AYS
OK 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 AA LW
LAW
OK
AYAAA Y
WS
SYLS 3
AYOSFOFFF OFF
AALYW
15 ALW
OK
ASLAA
WY
AYS 3
OSFFOFF
OFF
15 ALWAYASL3WAYS
OK 3 ALWAYASLWAYOSF
sec ALWAYS OFsF
ec sec ALW YS sec sec LW sec sec ALW YS sec sec ALWAYS OFFOFsO
FFF
ec
sOe
Nc ON OONNON ON
ON ON
ON ON OONN ON ON s
Oe cN
NO ON ON
AVINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GIS NGS TAP
You cFaonF rumosreamt1t51h
a0 te Ha1O r55dKBut3tons 15 15 1015 A1O KO
L5W 1K
5A OK
Y5S 3 3 3 151510 1 A5A
LWLO
W O
A K
Y
5
A
O
LK
YWSK
S AYS33 3 You can a15ls1o A5c
101
5 AO
Lh
W La
AWK
n
YLOOgK
W
5S
A
KeSYtS3he
YA 3 3setting 15 15 101A5LWAY OKO
L3S OK
WAYS
5 K
3 3 3 15 15 3 KO
O
escec sec sec sescescec sec
sec sec secsec You can alssesocesceccsh
ec
aOnONsNg
ec
eONthsesececsseectting sec sescec sec sec sec sec sesce
scec sec
ON ON sec secsec sec sec
to cyScEleTStTE hIT
rM osTuE IgMhEth seec Bacskelcight secON by directlysepc reOsNsOinNOgN onsetcheTAlPeTvAPel sT
eAcP sec s
anegtehTetAhsPe tsteinttging
10
sec ec sec secsec sescec sec sescec sec
10
You can as1e0lcss1oe0csecchs5eac sn5ecg
5
sece the setting
Yocuancaanlssa1oe0clssc1eo0h
You acn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
10 5 5 5
csec sec secsec
10
sec
10 5
sec se
botYtooumco f tahlesosccrheaenngO eRthe setting You Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn hg
E levteoL c. yNLcG
lsA lAeU
NtA hGG rUoEAuGghE the Backlight to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethBeacBkalcigkh ligt ht an by directly pressing on the level bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein ssgTin
Aog
Pnotn
hethlevlelvel TA
Accédez au menu Settings (réglages), tel Touchez la durée de rétroéclairage
settings of which there are 6
leDvE elFsDA. EUFLATULOTK
setsteinttgins gosf o
levlelvse. ls.
wfhwichhicth eth
OK
reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the
bottom of tO hKe screen OR
bybtoy utoch
bobttootm
uicnhgintghethaerraorw
tom
of o thf eO
thK
OKsecrsecern
roswosnotnhethe
TAPTAP
eeOnROTRAP
qu’indiqué
You cFaonr F umo àthaet la
saertm HaOrd
page 52. Touchez
K Buttons OKOK OK BACKLIGHT; OO KKOsouhaitée.
K You can also chOaK Sélectionnez
O
ngO
KeKthe setting
TAP
OKOO OFF
KK pour OK O
l’écranto cycde
setYto
le througréglage
inugcsaonf u
h the Backlight Backlight (rétroéclairage)
wsheicthethHearredaBreut6tons YouYcoauncuasneuth see tHhaerd
You can also change the setting
HaBrudttBountstons by touching the arrow désactiver
s on the You can le alsorétroéclairage.
by directly pressing on the level
change the setting YouYcoauncaaln
TAP TAP
soaclshoacnhgaentghee tsheettsineg tting
TAP TAP
VINGSapparaîtra.
levteolsc. ycle thrLe ough thréglage
e Backlight to cBacklight
tycle through the Bacdétermine
o c yc l e t h ro u g h t h e B a c
klightk l i g h t b oY
t o
tou
m c a
o n
f a
tla rows on the bybtboyyudctiorheuincctghlyitnhpgeretahsrserionawgrrsooonwnsthtohenelethveel by dbiyredcitrleycptlryespsriensgTsAionPng tohne tlheveelel vel
l
h s
e osc h
reaenngOe t
R h e s e t t i n g Yo uYcoauncaalns oacl s
h oacnhgaentghee t
s h
e e
t tsi e
n t
g t i n g
TA
settings of which there are 6 settsinegttsinogfswohf iw chhtichherteheare a6re 6 by touching the arLorsque vous aurez terminé, touchez
AVINdurée
GS Plependant
11: 05 PM
OvPeWO
ls. W
ERERSASVAIVNIG
SETTINGS Nlaquelle
SGS levelelsv. ele
ls.
11: 05 PM
rétroéclairage SETTINGS bottomde of the screen OR
11: 05 PM bottboomttoom
f thoef tshceresecnreOeR
SETTINGS n OR 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
S
l’afficheur demeure allumé avant de s’éteindre.
11: 05 PM
SIN
SETTS
POWER SAVINGS
ETTINGS
ETGTSINGS
11: 051111
P::M
05 PM
05 PM TSE
SETS ET
IN
TGTS
POWER SAVINGS
TINGS
INGS
l’icône OK.
11: 015111
P : 05 PM
: 0M5 PM SETTSET
IN
S EG
TINGS
TS
TINGS
POWER SAVINGS
11: 05111
P: 05 PM
1:M05 PM SET
ST
SETT
POWER SAVINGS
EITNTGSIG
IN
NGS
S
11:10151: 01
P5:M
05 PM
PM SETSTESIT
N
POWER SAVINGS
ET TINGS
TGIS
NGS
11:151:1
01 P:M
05
05 PM
PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
ESS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENSE
SSS PO WES
ERA
RV
P
15OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POP
W
1 EW
5O R SSIAN
AVV
IIN
G NGGSS
S
OFF
P
15O
POW
P EW
OR E
WSR
EARVS A
AV
SIN GIIS
V N
NGGS
OFFS PO
PW
15PW
OOW
ER EA
S
ERRSVA
SIV
AIV
N NIS
G N
GSGS
OFF
POP5P
1WOO
E W
WR E
ESRSVS
RA A
VV
AIN NIS
IG N
GGSS OFF
PO
POW WS
ER EA
R
min min min min min
VHNITN
GSGS
RÉGLAGE
POPPW
O EW
OPWOR
EW
REESR
DE BABCAKC
AASSVVAIANIVNV
SR
LKIG
LA FONCTION D’ÉCONOMIE D’ÉNERGIE
LH
IG
IGNSGS
G
INS
G
THT
10
min
10
15
m in
min
1
min
OFF
10
min
15
15 1155
m i nm
min
O
1
mFi nF
n OFFOFF
miin
10
min
min m
15
15 1155
min
min
1
i n OFF OOmFFFFi n
10
min
m im
15
15 1515
inni n
nm im
Fm
OFO
1
Oi n
FF
FF
10
min
m i nm
1
15 1515
mi ni n
min
OFFOm
1
OiFnF
FF
15 15
min min
AAVVININGSGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
5 2
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
5 2
10m11
11: 05 PM
0 1 11
SETTINGS
5
15 m 1125
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
5
11: 05 PM
15m12i51 5 1 11
SETTINGS
5 2
15m1
11: 05 PM
15 1 1 1 1
1 2
1i0n 10 1100 10 1100 1 1 10 1010 10 1010 10 10
1
m0i n m 1 min i5
n min i5n 1 min n min in
S min
OWER SAVm INi1nG
min m i nmmi ni n
POWER SAVm
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min m in
m i n m i nm i n m i n m i n
m i nGS
min m i nm im
POWER SAVm
n
in
m i ni n m i n m i nm imn i n m i nmm
in
POWER SAVm
in
min in m i n m i nmmi ni n min min
m i nm
11: 05 PM
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
NSTG
SETTSIE
P
ETSTIN
TIGNSGS
S 1:05 PM
1: 0511P1:M
05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTSESG
IN TET
P
STIT
NIG
O
NS
W
GS
E R S A V I N
11:M
11: 051P 1
0:50P
5MPM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING1S 1: 05 P1M
1: 05 PM
11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
SETTINGS
ING S 1:05 PM
11: 05 P1M 11: 05 PM SETTINSG
ESTTINGS
5 55 2 22 5 5 2 2 5 55 2 22 5 55 2 22 5 5
SS BRIBGRHITGNHETSNSESS
5
min
2
min m i nmmi ni n m i nmmi ni n min m
5
in
min min min
2
min m i nm im
n
in m i nm im
n TAP
in m i nmm
in
in m i nmm
in
in min min
GE LALNAGNUG AU
P1GAE
5OWGEE
R SAVINGS
OFF
POP
W PEO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
15OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
P1P
POW EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
PO
P1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POP1W P
EO
RW EV
SARIN
SA
GVSINGS
5OWER SAVI NGS
OFF
POWP
EO
RW EV
SAR
min min min min min
NTGS BACBKALCIK
GLHITGHKT TAP TAPTAP
DED
FEAF10A
U LUTLTO10 15 1 10 15 115515
OK 1 10 15 115155
OK 1 10
OK
15 1155 15 1 10
OK
15 151 15 1 15 15
OF
mFi n OFF OFF OFF
OFF OF i nF OFF OFF OFF OFF min O
min
mi ni n
m min
i ni n OFmFi n
mi nm
m i nm m i n m i n mm
mi niinn m min
mi ni nm i n OFmFi n
min
m min
ni n OFmFi n
mi nim
m i nm min
VINGS POW PO ER WS EA RVSIN AV GISNGS TAP
YouFcO aF nROMuRsAeMTm1tmA T 1O
05he Ha 20K
rd Bumt1itnons 10 10510 1O
0K O
1m
O KK
251 0 1 1 1 OKO OK K
10 10150 15 125 15 1 1 1 You can alms10ionm1m0in5cinm1h0ina1n K25O
O51g
O
m ie
K1K
5 1 1 1
n the setting
10 105 10 1 O5K O O1K
12 K 5 1 1 1 10 10 1 KO
O
nTiA
i ni n min m i nmm i ni n in m i n mm
i niinn m i n m m i n P m i nm i nm i n
i nm
m im
min min min
n i n min
m
mi ni nm i n mm
i ni n m i n m i nm i nm i n m i n m i nmm
i nim
n in
m im min min min
min m
to cSyEcTlS eTEtIhTMrToEIuM gE h tmhien Power You can also chanmgien the setting by directly pressinmgi non the TlAePvTAePl n
savYin 5
erame2irndarBeu6ttons Yocuancaunseumst5e tinmhHineam2H
5 5 2
a2 rBdinuBttuotntos ns by touching mt5ihn e5ma5inrmr2ion w2ms2in on thTeAP 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5 5 2 2 2 5 5
og uscoafnwuhseicmthihn tehH You ih
nme irnd You can alsmoinmicn mhinamninmginemT Yocuancaanlsaomlsicnmoh cinhn mg
ainnemigntmehinethse tsteinttging
anegteheA
m i nm min min thPe setting You
in i na
m
TAP
min
T
min m
E levtLeolAsc.NLyG ANGG
clUeAth
UEAGE
rough the Power to tcoycclyectlehrtohuroguhgth ethPeoP woew r er botYtooumcof tahlesosccrheaenngO
an eRthe setting Yobu Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
y directly pressing on the level
hg thse tsteinttging bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrsein s sg i nognotnhethlevlelvel
bybtoy utoch
uicnhgintghethaerraorw roswosnotnhethe
savsianvgins gosf o
wfhwichhicth eth reearerea6 re 6 by touching the arrows on the TAPTAP
eeOnROTR AP
sDaEvFiD nAE
gUFsLAoTUfw LO ThKich there are 6 O K
levels. levlelvse. ls. bottom of thOeKscreen OR bobttootmtom
of o thf etOhsKecrsecern OK
53
the Minute change from AM and PM. hour
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
TIME SET TIME SET
T TIME
11: 05 PM
1 SETTINGS
SETTINGS
BRIGHTNESS
BACKLIGHT
SET TIME
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
SS
EE
TTTTIM
IMEE
11: 05 PM
11: 05 PM
SETTISNEGTSTINGS
BRIGHTNESS
BACKLIGHT
SET TIME 2
11: 051P1M
: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS
SSEETTTTIM
IMEE
111: 0: 055PPMM SEST
SET
ETITN
TTIG SG
INNGSS
SE
ST
S ETTITT
E MIIM
E
ME
111:10115::00P55MPPM
E
M SS
SE
E ETTT
T IIN
ITN GG
N SS
GS
SSEETTTTIM
IM
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
POWER SAVINGS POWER SAVINGS
ESS SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
1112
SET TIME
0055 PPM 11
251 LDTIME
SET
HO
005065 PP
MM
P M 1
321 0055
25 PM SE1
T1TIME 05 AM 1111 4055 APMM S1
E2T TIME05 PM M
T TAP TAP TAP TA
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
AVINGS
D
HOL
DE
1F
1AULT05 DE1F2AULT 05
D PM 12 05 PM PM 11 06 PM 11 05 AM
HOL TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP
OK FORMAT OK OO
KK FORMAT OK O
OKK OO
KK
OK OKK
O
E
TAP
rrow to go Back in TU
apsinthgetu
hpeh
ararrodwbtuottaodnvsaynocue cthan
e Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrroow
w ttoo aaddvvaannccee tthhee TTaTap
apptththh
eeedduoopw anraraorrrw
wn twotto
roow aodggvoaonBBcaaeccktkhiinen TTaapp tthhee ud upopwoarn
rrdoaow
rrwotn
hsoeutrtheTtAP e but without control the hour
im TAP tthh
heo uMor iu
Rnraupteidly TAP ctM
hieannhugoteeufrrRoampiAdM ly a
Accédeztime chaau
OKmenu Settings (réglages), tel Touchez la flèche de l’heure vers le haut ou
idly Tap the OK button to confirm the hMoiunrute eh
nge over individuO aK
l hrs or mins. It will OK OK OK
just cycle through.
qu’indiqué àw to ala
Tap the up arro dvancepage
the Tap the52.
down arroTouchez
w to go Back in TapSET
the up arrow tole
advancbas pour
e the Tap the down arrégler l’heure.
row to go Back in Tap the up or doMaintenez
wn arrow to
change from AM and PM.
la
TIME; l’écran de réglage Time (heure) flèche enfoncée pour régler l’heure
hour the hour Minute the Minute
apparaîtra. rapidement.
SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SS
EETTTTIN
INGG
SS 111: 0: 055PPMM SESTETTIN
TIG
NSGS 111: 015: 0P5MPM S
SEETTTTIIN
NGGS
S 1111::0055 P
PMM SES
TETTTG
IN INSGS
E
TT
IMTEIME 3
11: 05 PM
S1E1T: 0T5INPGMS
SET TIME
SETTINGSSETTINGS
11: 05 PM
5
SETLTDSEE
IM
HO 05
T TIME
PM
11: 05 PM
S1E1T: 0T5INPGMS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTISNEGTSTINGS
3
SETSTEIM
05
TE
TIME
PM
11: 05 PM
S1E1T: 0T5INPGMS
SET TIME
SG
11: 05 PMSETTIN
52
1
ET
STINGS
SETDSTE
HOL0350
TETIME
IM
PPD
LM
M
4 11:05 PM
S1E1T: 0T5INPGMS
SET TIME
HO
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
311
SET TIME
02
55
S1E1T: 0T5INPGMS
PP
MM
SET TIME
11: 05 PSM
ETTINGS
121
SET TIME
3005
11:05 PM
AD
P
HOL
M 111 25
45
1OLD30 06 1P PM 11 HOLD05
D
505 1P1MPM 05 PM 3 12 05 05 1P2M PM 05 12 1H MPM 05
2D PM 11 11 25 05 1P1MAM 06 L1D
HO1A M AM11 45 AM
HOL
PM 05
TAP TAP TAP
OK OK O
OKK OO
KK OK OO
KK
TAP
Dw to advance the
Tap the upHaOrLro vvD TUapsin
thgetdhoewhnaradrrbouw
HOL
Tap the down arrow to go Back in TTaapp tthhee uupp aarrrrooww ttoo aadd aannccee tthhee TTaapptthheeddoow wnnaarrrroow
wttooggooBBaacckkiinn Tap the up arrow to advance the
TAP TAP TAPtthheehM ThA
teP O thseetM
thineuttim eabpuid
t lw
hour Rapidly TAP the hour Rapidly hMoiunruRteapRiadplyidly oiunruRteapRiadplyidly TMap
intu RaKpbidultyton to confirm the eR y
OKOK OK OK OK OK OKOK OK OK OK OK OK OK time change OK over individual hrs
just cycle through
TAP
devtuaopngcaoerrBtohawecktoinaTdavpTaatnhpceeth
dteo up or down arroBwactkoin Using the hard buttons you can
w
Taatp
rorotahwdevtuo
apngcaoerrBtohawe
cktoinaTd
apvaTtnahcpeetdh
tohew
eunpaarTrarop
owwthttoeogdaoodw
B cakcreirnoth
vann wetoTagpToatBp
haetchukepindaorrwonw
Taatprortoahw hwe n arTraopwthtoe gdoown arrow to go Back in Tap the up or down arrow to
the Mhoinuur tReapidltyhe hour Min thueteMRin ap uitdely Minute thecM hainnugteefRroam AlM
pitdh and PM.
ey Minute Tap the OK buttcohnatnogceofnrofim heand PseMt .the time but without control
rmAtM
hour
Touchez la flèche des minutes vers le haut Touchez la flèche AM/PM vers le haut ou le
time change over individual hrs or mins. It will
just cycle through.
ou le bas pour régler les minutes. Maintenez bas pour régler l’appareil sur AM ou PM.
la flèche enfoncée pour régler les minutes
rapidement.
11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM 11: 05 PM 11: 05 PM
SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS SETTINGS
SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME SET TIME
30 3 OPD
M
H L 05 PM 11 25 12 PM 30 PD
HOL
M 11 05 11 AM 25 PM 11
54
45 11AM 05 AM 11 45 AM
MENU DES RÉGLAGES (SUITE)
5 SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11: 05 PM SETTINGS
SET TIME
11:05 PM
6
11 25 PM 11 05 AM 11 45 AM
3
HOL
D 1 2
OK OK OK
TAP
he Tap the down arrow to go Back in Using the hard buttons you can
the Minute Rapidly Tap the OK button to confirm the set the time but without control
time change over individual hrs or mins. It will
Lorsque vous aurez terminé, touchez just cycle through. Vous pouvez également régler l’heure en
l’icône OK. utilisant les touches Gauche/Haut 1 et
Droite/Bas 2. Chaque pression permet d’obtenir
une augmentation ou une réduction d’une
minute. Lorsque vous aurez terminé, appuyez
sur la touche Centre 3. Maintenez enfoncées
les touches Gauche/Haut et Droite/Bas pour
régler les minutes plus rapidement.
RÉGLAGE DE LA LANGUE
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
GE LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE LANGUAGE
ESS
GS 1
11: 05 PM
BRIB
SETTINSS
GH
G
EES
TTTTIINNGGSS
RITGNHETSNSESS
11: 05 P11M
LANGUAGE
11::0055PPM
M SES
TE
TITNTS
IN
G GTSINGS
EST
LALN
AGNLU
G
AAUA
NG
11:1015: 0P51M1P:M
GEG
UEAGE
05 PM SETTINS
G
SES
ETTTTIIN
NGGSS
LANGLLUA
AAN
NGG
EU
G UA
AG2
11: 05 P1M
GE
E
111::0055PPM
M SETSTEINGIES
TT
S NTG
TS
INGS
LALNAGN
LUA
GAN
UGG
AEU
GA
11: 0151:P
EGE
01M
51P
: 0M5 PM SETTS
ING
ES STIN
TE
T TIGNSGS
LANLG
LU
A AAN
N GG
GEA
U
11: 051P
UGAE
GE
11:M
015: 0P5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
LANGLUA
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
T BACBKALCIG
KEH
LNITG
GLH
IST
H SPANISH ENGLISH ENGLISH SPANISH
AVINGS POW
PEOR
WSEA
RVSS
IPN
AGVISNGS SP SP SP SP
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
FR
EN
EN
EN
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
ENGLISH ENSG
PL
AEIN
NIH
S SL
G HISH SPANS
IS
EPNH
AGNLIIS
SHH ENEGNLE
IS
GNLH
IGSLHISH ENG
SLP
EIA
S
NNH
GILSIH
SH SPANSI
SETSTEIT
MTEIME
SP SPSP SP SP S
SPP SPSTPAP
SP SP SP
SP SP
E LANLG AUNAGGUEAGE
OK OK OK OK OK
DEFD AEUFLATULT TAP TAP TAP TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
to cyFcO leRtFM
hOrA
oTuMgAhTtheOLKanguage
R OOKKOK You can also chaOnKgeOK the setting by directly pressin OgK OoKOnKthe O TK
AO POKK OK
settings of which there are 3 by touching the arrows on the Language
TAP TAP TAP
leveYlso. u can use the Hard Buttons YouYcoaun cuasne uths e tHhaerdHaBrudttBountstons bottom of the screen OR You can also change the setting YouYcoaun caalsnoaclshoanch gaentg he tsheettisnegtting
to cycle through the Language to cytoclceytchlerotuhgrohutghhe tLhaeng
Launagueage Yo u c a n a l s o c h a n ge the setting YoubYycoadunirceaaclsntolyaclpshoraencsh
g e
a t
n h
g e s
t
sing on theheet t i
s n
e g
t t i n g by dbiryed esgsTo
ctirlyecptrlyespsrin iAnnPgtohne the T
Accédez au menu Settings (réglages), tel
settings of which there are 3
levels.
settisnegttsinogf swohficwhhtih
levellesv. els.
chertehaere 3are 3 by touching the arrows on the
bottom of the screen OR Touchez la langue souhaitée.
by Ltab
onu
ygcth
bottboomttom
uiu
o angcgh etinhge tahrreoawrrsoownstohne the Lang
f thoef tshcreesecnreOeRn OR
Launagu eage
qu’indiqué à la page 52. Touchez LANGUAGE; Lorsque vous aurez terminé, touchez
l’écran de réglage Language (langue) apparaîtra. l’icône OK.
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11:05 PM
T DED
FAEU
FALTULT
DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT DEFAULT
ESS
11: 05 PM
BRIB
SSEETTTTIN
GH
GG
INSESS
RITGNHETSNSESS
TTINGS
DEFAULT
1111: 0
: 055PP
1MM
1: 05 PM SETTINS
GE
S ESTTTTIIN
NGGS
S
DEFAD
UE
D ELF
TA
F AU
11: 05 P11M
ULLT
T
11::0055 P
PMM SETTIS
NEGT
SESTITNIN
GS
GS
DEFD
55
AD
U
EELF
FTAUU
A
11: 05 1P11M
LL
TT
:10:505PM
PM SETTSIE
NTGTESITNTGIN
S SGS
DEF
DAED
U
FEL
11: 01
TUALUTLT
AF
51P:10
M15: 0
P5MPM SETTS
INES
G
TES
TTIN
TIG
NSGS
DEFD
AD
EUF
ELA
TA
FUU
11: 051P
LTLT
11M
:0
15: 0P
5MPM SETTINS
GESTTINGS
DEFAD
UE
NGS
ttooccyycclleetthhrroouugghhtthheeLLaanngguuaaggee
You can also change the setting YbYoyouudcicrae
annaallssoocchhaannggeetthheesseettttiinngg TAP
to cycle through the Language ctly pressing on the
by toouucchhiinnggtthheeaarrrroow wssoonntthhee bbyyddiirreeccttllyypprreessssiinnggoonntthhee
by touching the arrows on the
settings of which there are 3 sseettttiinnggssooffwwhhiicchhtthheerreeaarree33 bLayntg uage LLaanngguuaaggee
levels. lleevveellss..
bottom of the screen OR bboottttoom moofftthheessccrreeeennOORR
1 11: 015111
2
11: 05 PM TSEET TINGS P : 05 PM SETTITNINGS 11: 05 PM SE TT IIN
NGGS 11: 05 PM SE TTIN GS 1:10:5
05 PM SETTING GSS 11: 05 PM M SETTINGS
SETS IN
TGTS
INGS : 0M5 PM SESTETTINGSGS 111: 015: 0P5MPM SS
EETT
TTIN G
SS 1111: 0: 055PP
MM S
SEETTTTIIN
NGGS
S 111
1: 05 PPM
M SSEETTTTIINNG S 1111::0055PPM SETTINGS
ESS BBR
RIIG
GHHTTNNESSSS
DEE
FAULT DDEEFFAAUULLTT
DE FAULT
DEFAULT
DDEEFFAAUULLTT DDEFFAAUULLTT
DEEFAULT
DE
D
D
EFAUULLTT
EFFAAULT
DEF
DEF
NGS
HT BBNAACKKLLYIEIG
OC G
SHHTTYES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NO YES YES
AVINGS PPO
OWWEER
RSSAAVVIIN
NGGSS
YES NOO YY
EESS YY
EESS NO YES YES NO YESS YESS NOO YES YES NO Y
NO YES NN
O YES YES NNOO YYEESS YYEESS N
NOO Y
YEES Y
YEES N
NO YYEESS YYEESS NO Y
SSEETTTTIIM
MEE
TAP
E LLAANNGGU
UAAGGEE
OK OK OK OK OK
TTAAPP
DDEEFFAAU
ULLTT TAP
TAP
You can use the Hard Buttons You can also change the setting
FOR RMMAATT OK OO
KKK gOeKKthe setting OK O
to cyclFeOth rou gh the Default O You can also chanO by directly pressinO gKon the Yes or OK
O
TAP
K O
settings of which there are by touching the arrows on the No TAP
TAP TAP
2levYeolus. can use the Hard Buttons YYoouuccaannuusseetthheeHHaarrddBBuuttttoonnss bottom of the screen OR You can also change the setting YYoouuccaannaallssoocchhaannggeetthheesseettttiinngg
to cycle through the Default ttooccyycclleetthhrroouugghhtthheeDDeeffaauulltt You can also change the setting YbYoyouudcicraaenn
ctaallylssoporccehh
sasan
in
ngg
geeottn
hhetehsseetYttteiinsngg
or TnA
bbyyddiirreeccttllyypprreessssiin ggPoonntthheeYYeessoorr
Accédez au menu Settings (réglages), tel
settings of which there are
2levels.
sseettttiinnggssooffw
22lleevveellss..
whhiicchhtthheerreeaarree by touching the arrows on the
bottom of the screen OR
bN
Touchez YES pour rétablir les options sur
byoyttoouucchhiinnggtthheeaarrrroow
bboottttoom moofftthheessccrreeeennOORR
wssoonntthhee
NNoo
FORMATAGE
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
Format Format
1 2
FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT FORMAT
11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM SETTINGS 11: 05 PM
SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS 11: 0511
P:M
05 PM SETTSIN
ET
GTSINGS
SS BRBIG
RH
IG
THNTENOE
FSRS
SMS
AT FOO
RRMAT FOORRM AT FORFM
FORFMATMAT FORFM ATMAT FORMOART
ATMAT
FOROMR
FORFM
AT
ATMAT FORFM
O
GS
T BABCNAKC
LKIG
LH
ING
THT YES
O O NO YES YES NO YES YES NO NO YES NO NO YES
VINGS POPW
OEW
RESRAS
VA VG
IN INSGS
NO NO YES NO YES YES NO YES YES NOYES YES
NO NO Y NO NO YES
NONO NONO YESYES NONO YESYES YESYES NO ES YESYES NONO NONO YESYES NONO NO
SES
TETTIM
TIEME
TAP
LALNAGNUGAUGAEGE
OK OK OK TAKP
O OK
TAPTAP
DEDFEAFUALU
TLT
TAP
You cF aOnFRuOsR
M tThAeTHO
eAM arKd Buttons Formatting will erO aK sOO
eKKall data on You can also changOeKO O
thKKe setting You can also changeO OK KthOeKsetting OK
O KOK OKO
to cycle through the Format the player by touching the arrows on the TAP by directly pressing on the Yes or TAP
settYionugscaonf w TAP TAP
usheicthhethHearerdarBeuttons YFoouYrmocuaantctaiunnsgeuw stehiletl heHeraaH
rsdearBadullBtdtuoatn osn boFtYotoorFm
ttaos n um oattfnaitntahtgliesnw
orcam osgciclw
rlheeiaelrlnnaegsO
reaRsatehlleadlsal ed tnangonNoYYoou
ttaatio
2levtoelcsy. cle through the Format Yuocucaancnaanalslasoo lscochhacanhng agneegteh
thetehsesetstteitntintgigng You
Yocuancaanlsaolscohacn
hganegtehethse tsteinttging
ttohetcoypccllayeyctelehrrtohuroguhgth ethFeorFm oram t at tbheythtpo elaupycleahryinegr the arrows on the bbyybtoyduitroceh
ucitcnlhygip rheetshsaiernrag roosnwotshno sT
etnhYeetsheor bybdyirdeicrtelyctplyrepsrseinsgA Pgnotn TA
Accédez au menu Settings (réglages), tel
settings of which there are
2levels.
setsteinttgins gosf o wfhwichhicth eth reearereare bottom of the screen OR Touchez YES pour effacer toutes les bNoobttootm tom of o
ntg
thf ethsecrsecern
orw
eeOnROR NoNo
ino hethYe sYeosr or
2le2vlelvse. ls.
qu’indiqué à la page 52. Touchez FORMAT; données. Sélectionnez NO pour laisser les
l’écran de réglage Format (formatage) options telles quelles.
apparaîtra. Le réglage Format effacera Lorsque vous aurez terminé, touchez l’icône
11: 05 PM ABU
toutesMAoBdOeles
OTUT
l : MMX 00données
SETTINGS
REMARQUES :
• Vous pouvez toucher l’icône Retour pour retourner au menu précédent.
• Lorsque vous modifiez les réglages, vous pouvez également utiliser les touches
Gauche/Haut, Droite/Bas et Centre au lieu des icônes m, l et ®, respectivement,
pour naviguer et sélectionner les éléments indiqués dans la section des réglages.
57
GUIDE DE DÉPANNAGE
Si votre appareil semble avoir un problème, vérifiez le tableau ci-dessous avant de contacter un
centre de réparation autorisé.
58
GUIDE DE DÉPANNAGE (SUITE)
59
FORMATAGE DU LECTEUR
ATTENTION! Formatez le lecteur uniquement s’il ne fonctionne pas
correctement et si un employé de l’assistance technique vous a conseillé de
le faire. Le formatage efface les contenus de la mémoire interne ou externe.
NETTOYAGE :
Utilisez le chiffon fourni pour nettoyer la surface délicate de l’écran tactile.
60
RÉINITIALISATION DE L’APPAREIL
Si le lecteur ne fonctionne pas correctement, réinitialisez-le en insérant un objet
mince (comme un trombone) dans l’ouverture de la touche de réinitialisation
Reset pour appuyer sur celle-ci. Consultez la page 6 pour trouver l’emplacement
de la touche de réinitialisation. Après la réinitialisation, attendez 30 secondes
avant de remettre l’appareil en marche.
REMARQUE : Après avoir appuyé sur la touche de réinitialisation Reset, il peut
être nécessaire d’attendre plusieurs minutes avant que l’appareil ne se remette
en marche.
61
CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
Audio Réponse en fréquence 20 Hz à 20 kHz
Sortie pour écouteurs 8,5 mW, 16ohms (volume max.)
Rapport Signal/Bruit 90 dB (MP3) 54 dB (syntoniseur)
63
TouchMP
Touch MP3 Player